Modicon X80 RTU: BMX NOR 0200 H Module User Manual

Modicon X80 RTU
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU

BMX NOR 0200 H Module
User Manual
01/2016
EIO0000000505.06
www.schneider-electric.com
The technical characteristics of the devices described in this document also appear online. To
access this information online:
Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).
3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the
reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click
on the product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that
interests you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the data sheet.
6 To save or print a data sheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.
The characteristics that are presented in this manual should be the same as those characteristics
that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time
to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the manual and online information,
use the online information as your reference.
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you
have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication,
please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and
using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system
data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant
instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may
result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
2016 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
2 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Part I The RTU Module for X80 Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1 About the BMX NOR 0200 H Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Introducing the BMX NOR 0200 H Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part II BMX NOR 0200 H Hardware Characteristics . . . . 19
Chapter 2 Hardware Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Module Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rack Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installing a Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Grounding of Installed Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Modicon X80H (Hardened) Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Part III Communications Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 4 Ethernet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.1 Ethernet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Ethernet Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2 IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Methods for IP Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Rotary Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deriving IP Parameters from the MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3 Modbus TCP/IP Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
The Messaging Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Messaging Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
EIO0000000505 01/2016 3
4.4 SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SNMP Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
SNMP Operations Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.5 SOAP Web Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Designing a SOAP Client Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 5 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Serial Communication Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 6 Modem Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Modem Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Modem Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Modem Register Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Modem Communication Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connecting External Modem (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
How to work with External Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Part IV Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter 7 How to Work with RTU Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.1 RTU Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
IEC 60870-5-101/104 Protocols Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DNP3 Protocols Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.2 Clock Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Clock Synchronization with the RTU Protocol Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Clock Synchronization with the NTP Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.3 Time Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Event Time Stamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
7.4 Events Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Events Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Events Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.5 Integrity Poll Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Integrity Poll Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.6 Transmission Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.7 Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4 EIO0000000505 01/2016
7.8 Communication Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
RTU Protocols Communication Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 8 How to Work with Datalogging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
About Datalogging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Create a Datalogging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Datalogging Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Datalogging Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Datalogging File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Recommendation on Datalogging Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 9 How to Work with Email/SMS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
About the Email Service / SMS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Create an Email Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Email Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Email Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 10 How to Work with Embedded Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.1 Embedded Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Introduction to Embedded Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.2 Home Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.3 Setup Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Module Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
FTP Security Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.4 Diagnostics Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PLC Rack Viewer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NTP Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Clock Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Upload MIB File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
10.5 Monitoring Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Data Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Part V Configuring the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 11 Configuring the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuration Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EIO0000000505 01/2016 5
Chapter 12 Configuration and Debug with Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . 173
12.1 Configuration with Unity Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configuring with Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.2 Debugging with Unity Pro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Module Debugging Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
General Debugging Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Debugging Parameters for TCP/IP Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Chapter 13 Configuration with the Setup Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . 187
13.1 Web Site Configuration Common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Parameter Input Interface in Setup Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Serial Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Time Zone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Module and Protocols Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
RTU Protocol Service Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Backward Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.2 Web Site Configuration IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
IEC 60870-5-101 Master RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
IEC 60870-5-101 Slave RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
IEC 60870-5-104 Client RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
IEC 60870-5-104 Server RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
IEC Data Object Mapping Page and Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
IEC Data Object Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IEC Event Queue Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IEC 60870-5-101/104 Master/Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
IEC Data Length & Mapping Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
IEC Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13.3 Web Site Configuration DNP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DNP3 Master/DNP3 NET Client RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . 270
DNP3 Slave/Server RTU Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
DNP3 Channel Configuration Over UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DNP3 Data Object Mapping Page and Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
DNP3 Data Object Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6 EIO0000000505 01/2016
DNP3 Event Queue Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
DNP3 Master/ DNP3 Net Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
DNP3 Data Length & Mapping Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
DNP3 Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT . . . . . . . . . . 314
Chapter 14 Web Designer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Create a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
PLC Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Data Editor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Appendices ......................................... 325
Appendix A Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master . . 328
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave . . . 339
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Client . . . 350
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Server. . . 360
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master . . . . . . . . . . . 370
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Appendix B Ethernet Language Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
B.1 Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . 396
Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . 397
Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-
Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-
Specific Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
B.2 Exchange Objects of Type T_COM_ETH_BMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Details of Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type
T_COM_ETH_BMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type
T_COM_ETH_BMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the Non-IODDT Type
T_COM_ETH_BMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
B.3 Language Objects Associated with BMX NOR 0200 H Module
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Language Objects for Implicit Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Language Objects for Explicit Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Glossary ......................................... 411
Index ......................................... 415
EIO0000000505 01/2016 7
8 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device
before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention
to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 9
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation
of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.
10 EIO0000000505 01/2016
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This guide explains the architectures and features supported by the in-rack BMX NOR 0200 H
module for the Modicon M580 and M340 PAC modular controller platform. This guide includes
instructions for setting up RTU functions and protocols that are used in various telemetry and
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) applications, such as: water and wastewater, oil
and gas, power and hydropower, other distributed infrastructures.
Validity Note
This document is valid for Unity Pro 11.0 or later.
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number

Modicon M340 Using Unity Pro, Processors, Racks, and Power 35012676 (English),
Supply Modules, Setup Manual 35012677 (French),
35013351 (German),
35013352 (Italian),
35013353 (Spanish),
35013354 (Chinese)
Modicon Controllers Platform Cyber Security, Reference Manual EIO0000001999 (English),
EIO0000002001 (French),
EIO0000002000 (German),
EIO0000002002 (Italian),
EIO0000002003 (Spanish),
EIO0000002004 (Chinese)
Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and 31007131 (English),
Processors, User Manual 31007132 (French),
31007133 (German),
31007494 (Italian),
31007134 (Spanish),
31007493 (Chinese)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 11
Title of Documentation Reference Number
Web Designer for FactoryCast, User Manual 35016149 (English),
35016150 (French)
Modicon M580 Standalone System Planning Guide for Frequently HRB62666 (English),
Used Architectures HRB65318 (French),
HRB65319 (German),
HRB65320 (Italian),
HRB65321 (Spanish),
HRB65322 (Chinese)
Modicon M580, Hardware Reference Manual EIO0000001578 (English),
EIO0000001579 (French),
EIO0000001580 (German),
EIO0000001582 (Italian),
EIO0000001581 (Spanish),
EIO0000001583 (Chinese)
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website
at http://download.schneider-electric.com
Product Related Information
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control
systems. Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply
this product.
Follow all local and national safety codes and standards.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
12 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
The RTU Module for X80 Platforms
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Part I
EIO0000000505 01/2016 13
14 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
About the BMX NOR 0200 H Module
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 1
Introducing the BMX NOR 0200 H Module
Overview
The BMX NOR 0200 H module brings Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) functionality to the M580 and
M340 PAC platform.
The X80 RTU system provides an extensive set of control and communications features including
industry and telemetry standard protocols such as IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 and
Modbus TCP.
About the Module

The M580 and M340 PAC controller and its built-in RTU module are designed for installation and
operation in harsh environments and extended operating temperature ranges (see page 40).
The Modicon M580 and M340 PAC controller platform offers these features for telemetry
applications:
operations in extended temperature ranges and harsh environments
in-rack RTU module with support for IEC 60870-5-101/104, DNP3, and Modbus TCP
specialized function blocks (AGA, flow calculations)
expandable rack-based modular I/O configurations and remote I/O capabilities
high-density, discrete, analog, and I/O counting modules
isolated input power supply (various voltage ranges available 24, 24/48 Vdc, 125 DC 1000/240
Vac)
built-in CPU and modules with serial and Ethernet communication ports
support for Modbus TCP
local or remote downloading of operating system firmware
EIO0000000505 01/2016 15
The BMX NOR 0200 H module addresses a wide range of telemetry requirements:
conformal coating and extended operating temperature ranges
various communications methods
serial and TCP/IP networks
intranet
WAN
modem connections
various modem connections

serial and radio modems
GSM and PSTN modems
IP modems (GPRS, ADSL)
upstream communications with SCADA master stations for polling interrogation of data,
backfilling of time stamped event data, receiving master commands
downstream communications with other RTU substations, slave field devices and IEDs (for data
collection), sending commands, and synchronizing distributed control
remote programming and downloading of control program with Unity Pro software through
Ethernet or modem connections
remote diagnostic and monitoring with a built-in Web server
RTU Architecture
This illustration shows the RTU architecture, from SCADA to RTU substations through various
means of communication:
16 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Functions and Protocols

The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports these functions and protocols:
RTU protocols:
Built-in RTU protocols for serial or Ethernet communications
IEC 60870-5-101 (master or slave)
IEC 60870-5-104 (client or server)
DNP3 serial (master or slave)
DNP3 IP (client or server)
Modbus TCP (client or server)
Main RTU Protocol Features

Time synchronization through protocol facility or NTP
Data synchronization on demand of the SCADA
Balanced and unbalanced transmission mode
Events management with time stamping - Sequence of Events (SOE)
Events queue stored in RAM memory (up to 100,000 events for all clients)
Events data backfill to SCADA application via protocol facility
Report by exception data exchanges
Unsolicited messaging data exchanges
Protocol setup via Web page
Other built-in functions

Historical DataLogging with time stamping inside the module SD memory card
Email/SMS notifications
Web server for RTU set-up and remote diagnostic and monitoring
Advanced TCP/IP networking: NTP client, FTP client, or server, HTTP server, SOAP/XML,
communication server, SNMP agent, SMTP client.
NOTE: When the BMX NOR 0200 H module works as IEC-104/DNP3 Client, the number of
connected servers affects the module performance (webpage access, module start-up and data
exchange through the backplane.)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 17
18 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Hardware Characteristics
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Part II
BMX NOR 0200 H Hardware Characteristics
BMX NOR 0200 H Hardware Characteristics
About This Part

This part contains an overview of hardware characteristics for the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
For Modicon M340 system installation and specifications, see the book Modicon M340 Using Unity
Pro, Processors, Racks, and Power Supply Modules, Setup Manual.
For Modicon M580 system installation and specifications, see the book Modicon M580, Hardware
Reference Manual.
What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
2 Hardware Presentation 21
3 Hardware Installation 33
EIO0000000505 01/2016 19
Hardware Characteristics
20 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Hardware Presentation
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 2
What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Physical Description 22
Module Dimensions 23
LED Indicators 24
Ethernet Port 26
Serial Port 29
Electrical Characteristics 31
Rack Position 32
EIO0000000505 01/2016 21
Physical Description
External Features
The BMX NOR 0200 H module:
6
1
7
MAC Address: 2
-00
00-00-00-00-00-00 8
4 9
Ethernet
5
10
Serial
Callouts:
Item Description Description

1 LED display (see page 24) diagnostic indications
2 MAC Address unique address for each module, defined by the manufacturer
3 Memory card slot SD card can store Web site files and datalogging CSV files
(see page 38)
4 Ethernet port (RJ45 connector, Functions include:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) Ethernet TCP/IP network connection
(see page 26) Modbus TCP protocol support
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 NET protocols support
Unity Pro remote programming
5 Serial port (RS 232C/RS 485, Functions include:
non-isolated) (see page 66) serial communications: IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP3
external modem management
PPP/Modem communication: IEC 60870-5-104 or DNP3 NET
protocol
6 Ground connection contact by screw tightening
7 Ground connection contact by CEM clip 1
8 Rack connector plug to the a X80 rack
9 Rotary switches (see page 50) two rotary switches to provide a simple way to select an IP address
10 Ground connection contact by CEM clip 2
22 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Module Dimensions
Dimensions
The dimensions of the BMX NOR 0200 H module conform to the characteristics of the
BMXEXBP and BMEXBP racks:
112.8
mm
4.44
in. 94.3
3.71
103.76
4.08
3.93
100
32 86
1.25 3.38
EIO0000000505 01/2016 23
LED Indicators
Introduction
The LED indicators are located on the front of the BMX NOR 0200 H module (see page 22). LEDs
provide information on:
the memory card
communication with the modules
serial communication
communication on the Ethernet network
LED Descriptions
This illustration shows the diagnostic LEDs on the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
The colors and blink patterns of the LEDs indicate the status and operating conditions of Ethernet
communications on the module:
Label Pattern Indication

RUN (green): operational state on The module is operating and configured.
flashing The module is blocked by a detected software error.
off The module is not configured. (The application is absent, invalid,
or incompatible.)
ERR (red): detected error on The processor, system, or configuration detected an error.
flashing The module is not configured. (The application is absent,
invalid, or incompatible.)
The module is blocked by a detected software error.
off Operations are normal (no detected errors).

DL (red): download firmware on Firmware download is in progress.
(upgrade)
off Firmware download is not in progress.
SER COM (yellow): serial data status flashing Data exchange (send/receive) on the serial connection is in
progress.
off There is no data exchange on the serial connection.
24 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Label Pattern Indication

CARDERR (red): memory card on The memory card is missing.
detected error The memory card is not usable (bad format, unrecognized
type).
off The memory card is valid and recognized.
ETH ACT (green): Ethernet on Communication activity is detected.
communication off No communication activity is detected.
(transmission/reception) activity
ETH STS (green): Ethernet on Communication is OK.
communication status
2 flashes A MAC address is not valid.
3 flashes The link is not connected.
4 flashes There is a duplicate IP address.
5 flashes The module is waiting for a server IP address.
6 flashes The module is in secure and safe mode (with default IP address).
7 flashes There is a configuration mismatch between the rotary switches
and the internal configuration.
ETH LNK (green): Ethernet link status on An Ethernet link is detected.
off An Ethernet link is not detected.
NOTE 1: Rapid flashing is defined as ON for 50 ms and OFF for 50 ms.
NOTE 2: Slow flashing is defined as ON for 200 ms and OFF for 200 ms.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 25
Ethernet Port
General
The BMX NOR 0200 H module has a built-in Ethernet port supporting either Ethernet
communications via a modem communication or Modbus TCP/IP communication.
The following table describes the characteristics of the Ethernet communication channel:.
Characteristic Description
Protocols supported RTU protocols:
DNP3 NET (client or server)
Modbus TCP/IP (client or server)
Connection RJ45 female connector

Physical link Ethernet 802.3 - Ethernet II
The Ethernet port on the BMX NOR 0200 H module is a standard RJ45 connector. In an industrial
environment, use a cable with the following characteristics:
shielded twisted double pair
impedance 100 15 (from 1 to 16 MHz)
maximum attenuation 11.5 dB/100 meters
maximum length 100 meters
The following straight-through ConneXium cables fit these requirements for connecting terminal
devices:
Description Reference Length, m (ft)

Low Smoke Zero UL/CSA CMG
Halogen
Straight-through 490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 02 U 2 (6.6)
cable with RJ45
490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 05 U 5 (16.4)
ends
490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 12 U 12 (39.4)
490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 40 U 40 (131.2)
490 NTW 000 80 490 NTW 000 80 U 80 (262.5)
26 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Pin Assignment
The following illustration shows the Ethernet port:
MAC Address:
00-00-00-00-00-00-00
1
2
3
4
Ethernet
5
6
7
8
Serial
Pinout table:
Pin Signal
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 not connected
5 not connected
6 RD-
7 not connected
8 not connected
NOTE: If there is a connection via a shielded cable, the connector casing on the module is linked
up to the ground connection.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 27
Line Speed
These line speeds are available for the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
100 Mb in half duplex
100 Mb in full duplex
10 Mb in half duplex
10 Mb in full duplex
The user can not configure the line speed. Characteristics of speed adaptation are:
Auto-sensing and auto-negotiation allow the BMX NOR 0200 H module to quickly configure
itself to the local Ethernet switch's speed and duplex mode.
The negotiated speed between two Ethernet devices is limited to the speed of the slower device.
28 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Serial Port
General
The BMX NOR 0200 H module has a built-in serial port supporting either serial communications
via a serial link or modem communications via an external modem device (see page 65).
The following table describes the serial communication channels:
Characteristic Description
Protocols supported RTU protocols:
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-104 (PPP/Modem)
DNP3 serial
DNP3 NET (PPP/Modem)
Connection RJ45 female connector

Physical link RS 485 non-insulated serial link
RS 232 non-insulated serial link
Pin Assignment
The following illustration shows the RJ45 serial port:
MAC Address:
-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
1
2
3
4
Ethernet
5
6
7
8
Serial
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 RXD 5 D0
2 TXD 6 CTS
3 RTS 7 Power supply
4 D1 8 Common
Shielding
The RJ45 connector has eight pins. The pins used differ according to the physical link used.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 29
The pins used by the RS 232 serial link are as follows:

Pin 1: RXD signal
Pin 2: TXD signal
Pin 3: RTS signal
Pin 6: CTS signal
The pins used by the RS 485 serial link are as follows:

Pin 4: D1 signal
Pin 5: D0 signal
Pins 7 and 8 are dedicated to the power supply of the man-machine interface via the serial link:
Pin 7: 5 VDC/190 mA network power supply
Pin 8: common of the network power supply (0 V)
NOTE: The RS 232 4-wire, RS 485 2-wire, and RS 485 2-wire and power supply cables use the
same RJ45 male connector.
30 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Electrical Characteristics
Consumed Current
The BMX NOR 0200 H module can be inserted into any rack slot on the BMX XB station assembly
(see page 32).
This list shows the current that the BMX NOR 0200 H module consumes from the 24 VDC rack
power and the residual dissipated power:
BMX NOR 0200 H

Consumed current: 95 mA
Dissipated power 2.2 W
EIO0000000505 01/2016 31
Rack Position
Introduction
This topic describes the appropriate rack positions of the BMX NOR 0200 H module on a BMX XB
station assembly during installation (see page 33).
Rack Position
Mechanically, it is possible to position the BMX NOR 0200 H module in any available slot.
The following rack assembly includes a M340 CPU (in this case a BMX P34 2020) and a
BMX NOR 0200 H module. Rack positions 0 to 8 are indicated. (The double-wide power supply is
mounted at the beginning of the rack.)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 BMX P34 2020 at rack position 0

1 discrete I/O module at rack position 1
2 counter module at rack position 2
3 BMX NOR 0200 H module at rack position 3
4-7 available rack positions
8 extension module at rack position 8
NOTE: Refer to the Modicon M340 Using Unity Pro -- Processors, Racks, and Power Supply
Modules Setup Manual for specific part numbers.
32 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Hardware Installation
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 3

Topic Page
Installing a Module 34
Grounding of Installed Modules 36
SD Memory Card 38
Modicon X80H (Hardened) Equipment 40
Wiring Considerations 41
EIO0000000505 01/2016 33
Installing a Module
Introduction
WARNING
MODULE DESTRUCTION - LOSS OF APPLICATION
Disconnect all power to the rack before the installation of the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
damage.
This topic provides steps for installing the BMX NOR 0200 H module on a BM XBP rack.
Modicon X80 modules are powered by the rack bus.
Fitting operations (installation, assembly, and disassembly) are described below.
Installing a module
A BMX NOR 0200 H module is installed on the BMX XB rack in slot marked 01-08.
The following diagram shows a BMX NOR 0200 H module mounted on a BMX XB rack in the slot
marked 01 (address 1):
NOTE: Before installing a module, take off the protective cap from the module connector located
on the rack.
NOTE: In a Modicon M340 system the total number of communication modules, such as BMX NOE
010 or BMX NOR 0200 H modules, cannot exceed two. The maximum Ethernet port for M340
system is 3 including the port on PLC. Therefore, a maximum of two BMX NOR 0200 H modules
can be inserted in a M340 system.
NOTE: For Modicon M580 system module limitations, refer to System Throughput Considerations
topic in Modicon M580 Standalone System Planning Guide for Frequently Used Architectures
(see page 11).
34 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Mounting Instructions
To mount a module on the BMX XB rack:
Step Action Illustration

1 Position the two pins on the reverse The following diagram describes steps 1 and 2:
side of the module (at the bottom) in
the corresponding slots on the rack.
Note: Before positioning the pins,
remove the protective cover.
2 Incline the module towards the top
of the rack so that the module sits
flush with the back of the rack. It is
now set in position.
3 Tighten the safety screw so that the The following diagram describes step 3:
module is held in place on the rack.
The recommended tightening
torque is between 0.4 and 1.5 Nm.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 35
Grounding of Installed Modules
General
The grounding of modules is crucial to avoid electric shock.
Grounding Processors and Power Supplies
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Ensure ground connection contacts are present and not bent out of shape. If they are, do not use
the module and contact your Schneider Electric representative.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Tighten the clamping screws of the modules. A break in the circuit could lead to an unexpected
behavior of the system.
damage.
All Modicon X80 modules are equipped with ground connection contacts at the rear for grounding
purposes.
36 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Example of Modicon M340 module:
These contacts connect the grounding bus of the modules to the grounding bus of the rack.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 37
SD Memory Card
Introduction
The Secure Digital (SD) memory card slot is located on the front of the BMX NOR 0200 H module
(see page 22). The BMXRWS128MWF memory card is delivered with the module.
WARNING
RISK OF LOST APPLICATION
Do not remove the memory card from the module while the PLC is running. Remove the memory
card only when the power is off.
damage.
Card Functionality
This table describes the functionality of the BMXRWS128MWF memory card when inserted into
the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
SD Memory Card Data Storage Functionality

BMXRWS128MWF 128 MB Memory for Web pages
Storage of Datalogging files (CSV)
Card Services
NOTICE
INOPERABLE MEMORY CARD
Proceed with a firmware upgrade with Unity Loader tool when replacing the SD memory card.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTICE
INOPERABLE MEMORY CARD
Do not format the memory card with a non-Schneider tool. The memory card needs a structure
to contain program and data. Formatting with another tool destroys this structure.
Do not use a write-protected memory card with the module. Some services do not operate
properly when the memory card is write-protected.
38 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Precautions
NOTICE
MEMORY CARD DESTRUCTION
Do not touch the memory card connections.
Keep the memory card away from electrostatic and electromagnetic sources as well as heat,
sunlight, water and moisture.
Avoid impacts to the memory card.
Check the postal service security policy before sending a memory card by postal service. In
some countries the postal service exposes mail to high levels of radiation, as a security
measure. These high levels of radiation may erase the contents of the memory card and
render it unusable.
Without SD Memory Card

If no memory card is inserted in the module, you cannot access the website. The following
diagnostic message appears:
Access Error: Site temporarily unavailable. Try again. No SD card
present.
NOTE: The Modicon X80 RTU module works only with a memory card that is present at boot-up
time. A memory card that is inserted during module operations is not recognized.
Although operation is possible without a valid memory card inserted in the module, a valid memory
card should be present at all times in the module.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 39
Modicon X80H (Hardened) Equipment
X80H
The Modicon X80H (hardened) equipment is a ruggedized version of X80 equipment. It can be
used at extended temperatures (-25...70C) (-13...158F) and in harsh chemical environments.
This treatment increases the isolation capability of the circuit boards and their resistance to:
condensation
dusty atmospheres (conducting foreign particles)
chemical corrosion, in particular during use in sulphurous atmospheres (oil, refinery, purification
plant and so on) or atmospheres containing halogens (chlorine and so on)
The X80H equipment, when within the standard temperature range (0...60C) (32...140F), has the
same performance characteristics as the standard X80 equipment.
At the temperature extremes (-25... 0C and 60... 70C) (-13...32F and 140...158F) the hardened
versions can have reduced power ratings that impact power calculations for Unity Pro applications.
If this equipment is operated outside the -25...70C (-13...158F) temperature range, the
equipment can operate abnormally.
CAUTION
Do not operate X80H equipment outside of its specified temperature range.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Hardened equipment has a conformal coating applied to its electronic boards. This protection,
when associated with appropriate installation and maintenance, allows it to be more robust when
operating in harsh chemical environments.
40 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Wiring Considerations
The Link
The following situations can create a temporary disruption in the application or communications:
The RJ45 10/100 BASE-T interface connector gets connected or disconnected when the power
is on.
Modules are re-initialized when the power is switched back on.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 41
42 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Communications Characteristics
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Part III
About this Part

This part describes Ethernet and Serial communications.

4 Ethernet Communications 45
5 Serial Communications 65
6 Modem Communications 71
EIO0000000505 01/2016 43
44 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Ethernet Communications
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 4

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
4.1 Ethernet Services 46
4.2 IP Parameters 48
4.3 Modbus TCP/IP Messaging 53
4.4 SNMP 57
4.5 SOAP Web Services 62
EIO0000000505 01/2016 45
Section 4.1
Ethernet Services
Ethernet Services
Ethernet Services Overview
Introduction
This topic introduces the different Ethernet services available via the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
Support of Modbus TCP messaging (see page 53)
Support of DNP3 NET and IEC 60870-104 protocols
Built-in HTTP server
Other supported IP protocols:
NTP client
FTP client / server
BootP client, DHCP / FDR client
SNMP agent (see page 57)
SMTP client
SOAP / XML server (see page 62)
Modbus TCP Messaging

This service allows the exchange of data between devices supporting Modbus over TCP/IP.
NMT
The NMT (Network ManagemenT) protocol provides services for network initialization, diagnostic
and control, and also device status control.
46 EIO0000000505 01/2016
NTP
The NMT (Network Time Protocol) is a protocol used for synchronizing the clocks of computer
systems.The time synchronization service establishes time accuracy among devices clocks over
a Ethernet network.
FTP
The FTP (File Transfer Protocol) is the World Wide Webs file transfer protocol.
BootP
bootstrap protocol. A UDP/IP protocol that allows an Internet node to obtain its IP parameters
based on its MAC address.
DHCP
The DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol) is a TCP/IP protocol that allows network devices
(DHCP clients) to obtain their IP addresses from a DHCP server through a request to the server.
FDR
The FDR (faulty device replacement) service offers a method of handling device replacement
without disrupting the system nor interrupting service.
SNMP
The SNMP (simple network management protocol) is a UDP/IP standard protocol used to monitor
and manage nodes on an IP network. The SNMP agent supports both the MIB II and the
Transparent Ready Private MIB (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and
Processors, User Manual).
SMTP
The SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol) is a transmission protocol for sending e-mail. SMTP
messages are usually retrieved from a server with an e-mail client (such as POP or IMAP).
SOAP / XML server

The SOAP (Single Object Access Protocol) carried via the HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)
channel.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 47
Section 4.2
IP Parameters
IP Parameters
About this Section

This section describes the assignment of IP parameters to the BMX NOR 0200 H module. Each
network address must be valid and unique on the network.
What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Methods for IP Addressing 49
Rotary Switches 50
Deriving IP Parameters from the MAC Address 52
48 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Methods for IP Addressing
Overview
You should establish a standard procedure for assigning valid and unique IP addresses for each
module and CPU on a network.
This topic explains the different IP addressing methods available.
Addressing Methods
The BMX NOR 0200 H module can have its IP address set through the rotary switches
(see page 50), the Unity Pro IP Configuration tab (see page 178), or combinations of the two:
Address Description
Method
STORED The lower rotary switch is set to STORED (manufacturer default setting), and the module
uses the Unity Pro application configured parameters.
device name There are two components of the device name:
(over DHCP) default device name of the module: BMX_0200_xxy
numeric value from 00 to 159 set on the rotary switches (see page 50)
(For the default device name, xx is the value of the upper rotary switch and y is the value of
the lower rotary switch.)
Example: For a BMX NOR 0200 H module, values of 120 (12 x 10) and 6 (6 x 1) on the
respective upper and lower rotary switches indicate a value of 126. The value is appended
to the default device name (BMX_0200_xxy) to create the valid DHCP device name of
BMX_0200_126.
CLEAR IP The lower rotary switch is set to CLEAR IP, and the module uses its MAC-based default IP
address (see page 52).
BOOTP Set the lower rotary switch (see page 50) to one of its BOOTP positions to get an address
over BOOTP (see note).
Note: To configure the module in the application to get its address from a BOOTP server,
see "from a server," below.
from a server A server-assigned IP address can then be obtained from either a BOOTP or DHCP server.
(STORED) BOOTP:
Set the lower rotary switch to one of its STORED positions.
Select From a server on the IP Configuration tab (see page 178).
Leave the Device Name field empty.
DHCP:
Set the lower rotary switch to one of its STORED positions.
Select From a server on the IP Configuration tab (see page 178).
Enter a valid device name in the Device Name field.
Note: The X80 Ethernet modules will not receive an IP address from a BOOTP/DHCP
server on application download if the IP configuration has not changed.
disabled Communications are disabled.
Note: A mismatch can occur when the assigned address is a mismatch for the address in the application.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 49
Rotary Switches
Introduction
The BMX NOR 0200 H operates as a single node on an Ethernet LAN and possibly other
networks. The two rotary switches on the back of the module provide a simple way to assign a
unique IP address:
NOTE: Set the arrow firmly into the desired position. If you do not feel the switch click into place,
the value of the switch may be incorrect or undetermined.
Summary of Valid IP Address Settings

Each rotary switch position that you can use to set a valid IP address is marked on the module.
The following information summarizes the valid address settings:
device name: For a switch-set device name, select a numeric value from 00 to 159. You can
use both switches:
On the upper switch (Tens digit), the available settings are 0 to 15.
On the lower switch (Ones digit), the available settings are 0 to 9.
The device name is calculated from the sum of the two switch values. For example, a
BMX NOR 0200 H module with the switch setting displayed in previous figure is assigned the
DHCP device name BMX_0200_123.
The selection on the lower switch of any non-numeric position (BOOTP, STORED, CLEAR IP,
DISABLED) makes the setting on the upper switch inconsequential.
BOOTP: To get an IP address from a BOOTP server, select either of the two BOOTP positions
on the bottom switch.
STORED: The device uses the Unity Pro applications configured (stored) parameters.
CLEAR IP: The device uses the default IP parameters.
DISABLED: The device does not respond to communications.
The functionality of the rotary switch when used in conjunction with the Unity Pro IP Configuration
tab (see page 178) is discussed throughout the IP Address chapter (see page 48).
50 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Switch Labels
To assist you in setting the rotary switches to their proper positions, a label is affixed to the right
side of the module. The switch settings are described in this table:
Upper Switch
0 to 9: Tens value for the device name
(0, 10, 20 ... 90)
10(A) to 15(F): Tens value for the
device name (100, 110, 120 ... 150)
Lower Switch
0 to 9: Ones value for the device name
(0, 1, 2 ... 9)
BOOTP: Set the switch to A or B to
receive an IP address from a BOOTP
server.
Stored: Set the switch to C or D to use
the applications configured (stored)
parameters.
Clear IP: Set the switch to E to use the
default IP parameters.
Disabled: Set the switch to F to disable
communications.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 51
Deriving IP Parameters from the MAC Address
Introduction
If no IP parameters are received from the application when the rotary switch (see Modicon M340
for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors, User Manual) is set to Stored or Clear IP
positions, the module is configured at power-up with its default IP address. The default IP address
for the module is derived from its hardware MAC address in accordance with a default IP address
format.
Default IP Address Format

The default IP address format is 84.x.y.z:
84: a fixed value
x.y.z: The last three fields in the default IP address correspond to the decimal equivalents of
the last three bytes in the MAC address.
Example
For example a device with 00-00-53-12-01-C4 MAC address has the following default IP
address: 84.18.1.196 (12 hex = 18 dec, 01 hex = 1 dec, C4 hex = 196 dec).
52 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Section 4.3
Modbus TCP/IP Messaging
Modbus TCP/IP Messaging
About this Section

This section describes the functions and characteristics of the Modbus TCP/IP profile.

Topic Page
Data Exchange 54
The Messaging Configuration Tab 55
Messaging Configuration Parameters 56
EIO0000000505 01/2016 53
Data Exchange
Exchanges
Data exchanges take place in one of two modes:
server mode: All Modbus-over-TCP requests from the PLC are supported by the
BMX NOR 0200 H module.
client mode: This type of exchange enables Modbus-over-TCP requests to be sent using the
functions:
READ_VAR
WRITE_VAR
DATA_EXCH (see Unity Pro, Communication, Block Library)
NOTE: The maximum Ethernet frame size depends on the type of transaction. The maximum
frame size is 256 bytes for messaging.
The BMX NOR 0200 H module is used to manage these TCP connections using port 502
messaging:
servers (32 connections)
clients (16 connections)
Port 502
TCP/IP reserves specific server ports for specific applications through IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). Modbus requests are sent to registered software port 502.
Port 502 messaging paths:
server path:
Port 502 messaging can process up to 8 incoming requests from the network. Requests are
received during the previous scan and sent to the Modbus server in the IN section.
Port 502 messaging can process up to 8 responses from the Modbus server in the IN section
(including writing the data into the socket).
client path:
Port 502 messaging can process up to 16 outgoing requests from the application in the OUT
section (including writing the data into the socket).
Port 502 messaging can process up to 16 incoming responses from the network in the IN
section. Responses are sent to the application.
54 EIO0000000505 01/2016
The Messaging Configuration Tab
Introduction
To limit access to the BMX NOR 0200 H module, set the access control parameters on the
Messaging tab.
Messaging Tab
The following procedure shows how to access the Messaging page from the index page:
Step Action
1 Access the module configuration screen.
2 Select the Messaging tab (see illustration below).
The Messaging tab is shown below:

NOR configuration screen:
The messaging configuration parameters are discussed in detail on the following pages.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 55
Messaging Configuration Parameters
Accessing Messaging Configuration Parameters

Configuration parameters can be accessed in two areas on the Messaging tab screen:
the Connection Configuration area
the Access Control area
Connection Configuration Area

The Connection Configuration area is used to:
activate an access control utility
list the remote devices that can connect to the module according to a communication protocol
Access Control
The Access Control box is used to activate or deactivate control of remote devices that are
attempting to open a TCP connection to the module. The functionality depends on whether the box
is checked or not:
checked: Access control management is activated and the Access column of the table is active
(no longer grayed out).
The module can only communicate to the addresses entered in the 128 available spaces in
the IP address column.
With the module in client mode it can only connect to remote devices selected by the Access
column in the Connection Configuration table.
unchecked: Access control management is inoperative and the Access column of the table is
not active (grayed out).
With the module in server mode, remote third-party devices can connect as clients (before
communicating with the module) without being declared in the table.
NOTE: Access control is only effective on the TCP/IP profile and assists module operations in
server and client mode.
NOTE: If you select the Access Control check box but do not enter addresses in the IP address
column, messaging will stop working.
56 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Section 4.4
SNMP
SNMP
About this Section

This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

Topic Page
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview 58
SNMP Communication 59
SNMP Operations Example 61
EIO0000000505 01/2016 57
SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview
Introduction
An SNMP agent runs on:
Ethernet communication modules
CPUs with embedded Ethernet communications ports
Network management systems use SNMP to monitor and control Ethernet architecture
components for the rapid network diagnosis.
Network management systems allows a network manager to:
monitor and control network components
isolate troubles and find their causes
query devices, such as host computer(s), routers, switches, and bridges, to determine their
status
obtain statistics about the networks to which they are attached
NOTE: Network management systems are available from a variety of vendors. Schneider Electric
provides an SNMP-based diagnostics tool called ConneXview.
Simple Network Management Protocol

Ethernet communication modules support SNMP, the standard protocol for managing local area
networks (LANs). SNMP defines exactly how a manager communicates with an agent. SNMP
defines the format of:
requests that a manager sends to an agent
replies that the agent returns to the manager
The MIB
The set of objects that SNMP can access is known as a Management Information Base (MIB).
Ethernet monitoring and management tools use standard SNMP to access configuration and
management objects included in the devices MIB, providing that:
objects that SNMP can access are defined and given unique names
manager and agent programs agree on the names and meanings of fetch and store operations
Transparent Ready products support two SNMP network management levels:

Standard MIB II: This first level of network management can be accessed via this interface. It
lets the manager identify the devices that create the architecture and retrieve general
information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet TCP/IP interface.
MIB Transparent Ready interface: Schneider has obtained a private MIB, groupeschneider
(3833) (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors, User
Manual). This MIB includes a set of data that enables the network management system to
supervise the Ethernet services. The Transparent Ready private MIB can be downloaded from
the Web server on any Transparent Ready module in a PLC.
58 EIO0000000505 01/2016
SNMP Communication
Overview
SNMP defines network management solutions in terms of network protocols and the exchange of
supervised data.
The SNMP structure relies on the following elements:
Manager: The manager allows entire or partial network supervision.
Agents: Each supervised device has one or more software modules named "Agent" that are
used by the SNMP protocol.
MIB: The Management Information Base is a database or collection of objects.
The SNMP agent is implemented on the BMX NOR 0200 H module. This allows a manager to
access MIB-II standardized objects from the Modicon X80 agent through the SNMP protocol. The
MIB-II allows management of TCP/IP communication layers.
On the modules that support Ethernet communications, it is possible to access objects from the
MIB Transparent Factory, which provides specific information about Messaging.
The following figure shows the tree structure of the TFE Ethernet MIB:
The source file of the TFE private MIB (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules
and Processors, User Manual) is available on modules and CPUs that support Ethernet
communications. The MIB can be uploaded from the module webpage by selecting Upload MIB
File (see page 164). This file may be compiled by the major SNMP managers on the market.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 59
SNMP Protocol
The SNMP protocol defines 5 types of messages between the agent and the manager. These
messages are encapsulated in UDP datagrams.
Messages from the manager to an agent:
Get_Request: message used to obtain the value of one or more variables
Get_Next_Request: obtains the value of the next variables
Set_Request : sets the value of a variable
Messages from an agent to the manager:

Get_Response: allows the agent to resend the value of the requested variable.
Trap: allows asynchronous event signaling by the agent.
60 EIO0000000505 01/2016
SNMP Operations Example
Modicon M340 Example

The SNMP manager transmits read or write requests (Set_Request, Get_Request,
Get_Next_Request, etc.) for objects defined in the MIB - II SNMP and the SNMP agent of the
Modicon M340 module responds.
ETHERNET
3
4
1 SNMP manager
2 SNMP agent (Modicon M340)
3 Get_Response trap
4 Set_Request, Get_Request, Get_Next_Request
The module's SNMP agent transmits events (traps) to the Manager. The managed trap systems
are as follows:
Coldstart Trap:
On the BMX NOR 0200 H modules, the event is transmitted following a module supply
Reset, a processor Reset, or the downloading of an application to the PLC.
Authentication Failure Trap: An event is transmitted indicating that a network element
cannot be authenticated. The Community Name field in the received message is different to
the one configured on the module. This trap can be enabled during module configuration.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 61
Section 4.5
SOAP Web Services
SOAP Web Services
Designing a SOAP Client Interface
Introduction
A server interface enables a SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) client application to
communicate directly with a BMX NOR 0200 H Web server module.
SOAP / XML Communications

SOAP Web services are fully compliant with the W3C WS-I Web services standards. These
services provide an open and standard communication means for control level devices to interact
directly with information management applications using non proprietary SOAP protocol.
Web services are based on standards such as:
SOAP, the exchange protocol carried out over the HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
channel.
WSDL (Web Services Description Language), in XML format.
XML (eXtensible Markup Language), the universal data exchange standard.
BMX NOR 0200 H SOAP Web services act as SOAP server interfaces. They allow developers to
easily design client applications that can exchange data directly with BMX NOR 0200 H Web
servers. Applications such as Microsoft.NET, SQL Server, Microsoft Office (Excel), IBM
(WebSphere), SUN (Java, Eclipse), Lotus, Oracle, SAP, MES, ERP and so forth can be interfaced
directly with BMX NOR 0200 H using SOAP Web services.
Two kinds of Web services are provided in BMX NOR 0200 H modules as SOAP server interfaces:
ModbusXMLDA: Web service to implement data access to Modbus variables,
SymbolicXMLDA: Web service to implement Symbolic data access.
The Web services provided by BMX NOR 0200 Hare compatible with the WS-I basic profile 1.1.
62 EIO0000000505 01/2016
A SOAP Client Interface

The following table describes the process of designing a SOAP client interface:
Stage Action
1 Create the client application:
The development environment (for example, Visual Studio.net) connects to a
WEB server module where it can access a list of available WEB services. The
WEB server returns descriptions of the requested services as WSDL objects.
2 Develop the client application:
The developer integrates the WEB service APIs using the code retrieved in the
previous stage as a WEB reference and generates the client application.
3 Execute the client application:
In run mode, the client application communicates in real time with the WEB
server module using the SOAP protocol.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 63
64 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Serial Communications
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 5

Topic Page
Serial Port 66
Serial Communication Architectures 67
EIO0000000505 01/2016 65
Serial Port
Serial Communication
Serial mode is a point-to-point mode of data exchange between two entities. This provides
communication between master stations, substation devices, RTUs, and Intelligent Electronic
Devices (IEDs). It establishes client/server communication between different modules with a serial
link. The master is the client and the slave modules are the servers. The BMX NOR 0200 H serial
link module is a asynchronous serial line module that supports RTU Serial (master or slave
connections).
Serial communication using the BMX NOR 0200 H module is only possible using the RTU serial
protocols:
IEC 60870-5-101 (master or slave)
NOTE: The serial port is also used for the communication with an external modem (see page 71).
If a modem is connected, it is possible to perform serial RTU communication or Ethernet RTU
communication which depends on the type of modem.
66 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Serial Communication Architectures
General
All equipment connected via serial link to a BMX NOR 0200 H module use either:
an RS232 serial crossover cable
an RS485 serial crossover cable
Connecting Equipment
The BMX NOR 0200 H module uses serial link:
as master, in case of communication with several slaves with serial RTU protocols
as slave, when the module is directly linked with master or a supervisor (SCADA for example)
Master case:
M340 RTU (Master)
Serial
M340 RTU (slave) Other RTU equipment M340 RTU (slave)

(slave)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 67
Slave case:
RS 232 Serial Crossover Cable

The TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 serial crossover cable has two connectors:
RJ45 male
Nine-pin SUB-D female
The illustration below shows the pin assignment for a TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 serial cross cable:
68 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Connecting Cables and Accessories

The table below shows the product references of the cables and adapters to be used according to
the serial connector used by the equipment:
Serial Connector for Data Terminal Wiring

Equipment
Nine-pin SUB-D male connector TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 cable
25-pin SUB-D male connector TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 cable
TSX CTC 07 adapter
25-pin SUB-D female connector TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 cable

TSX CTC 10 adapter
EIO0000000505 01/2016 69
70 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Modem Communications
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 6

Topic Page
Modem Communication 72
Modem Support 73
Modem Register Command 75
Modem Communication Error Codes 77
Connecting External Modem (RS232) 78
How to work with External Modem 80
EIO0000000505 01/2016 71
Modem Communication
Overview
The BMX NOR 0200 H module can be used with several external modem types:
Radio
PSTN
GSM
GPRS
ADSL
There are three different ways to connect an external modem to a BMX NOR 0200 H module:
via the serial port, using serial communication protocol (IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP3 serial)
via the serial port and configuring a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) connection, using ethernet
communication protocol (IEC 60870-5-104 or DNP3 NET)
via the ethernet port and configuring a Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)
connection, using ethernet communication protocol (IEC 60870-5-104 or DNP3 NET)
NOTE: PPPoE connection is only used with an ADSL external modem.
72 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modem Support
Connection via Serial Link

The serial link connection can be used to configure and communicate with an external modem
(Radio/PSTN/GSM).
By default, the modem waits for an incoming call (Dial-in mode). When it receives an incoming call,
try to establish the connection.
NOTE: In the Dial-out mode, the serial link connection via modem can be created in the Permanent
mode (automatic connection at startup, at reboot or after connection loss) or in the On-demand
mode (by an internal register command).
NOTE: In the On-demand mode, Dial out is prior to Dial in. and Dial out may interrupt established
connection in Dial in mode.
Connection Point-to-Point Protocol via Serial Link

The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports PPP connections over serial links via a modem
(PSTN/GSM/GPRS).
With a PPP connection, once a telephone connection has been established, the modem link is
treated as a TCP/IP link.
A PPP connection enables two specific modes:
Server mode, which is the Dial-in mode
Client mode, which is the Dial-out mode.
NOTE: In the Client mode, the PPP connection via modem can be created in the Permanent mode
(automatic connection at startup, at reboot or after connection loss) or in the On-demand mode (by
an internal register command).
NOTE: For PPP connection authentication, the identification uses the Password Authentication
Protocol (PAP). Use PAP to configure any device that has a modem/PPP connection with the
BMX NOR 0200 H module. The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is not
implemented on the module. For an accepted connection, the PAP Username and Password of
the remote device must be known. The BMX NOR 0200 H module password and user name used
by the PAP protocol are the same as those of the HTTP server (by default: USER/USER).
The local IP address of the BMX NOR 0200 H module can be configured using the IP address
either:
specified by the User directly from the website. This is mandatory if the module is in Server
mode.
obtained from the PPP server (if specifying 0.0.0.0 as local IP) when establishing connection in
Client mode. The IP can then be a static or a dynamic address.
NOTE: In Server mode and no IP address is given by the User, the Server assigns a fixed IP to
the remote device with local IP+1. For example if the server IP is 90.0.0.2, remote device IP is then
90.0.0.3.
NOTE: GPRS does not support server mode.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 73
Connection PPPoe via Ethernet Link

The Ethernet link connection can be used to configure and communicate with an external modem
(type ADSL).
PPPoe connection is only available using Client mode (Server mode not supported).
NOTE: In the Client mode, the PPPoe connection via modem can be created in the Permanent
mode (automatic connection at startup, at reboot or after connection loss) or in the On-demand
mode (by an internal register command).
NOTE: For PPPoe connection authentication, the identification uses the Password Authentication
Protocol (PAP). Use PAP to configure any device that has a modem/PPPoe connection with the
BMX NOR 0200 H module. The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is not
implemented on the module. For an accepted connection, the PAP Username and Password of
the remote device may be configured in PPPoe panel from the website.
The configuration of IP address is not available for users. The BMX NOR 0200 H module obtains
a static or dynamic IP address when the PPPoe connection is established.
74 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modem Register Command
Introduction
Modem register commands are specified memory area allocated on the CPU. This memory area
is used to send commands from CPU to the BMX NOR 0200 H module via the rack to control the
connection or disconnection of the modem using logic functions.
Register Command
The commands are composed of 4 registers (%MW):
Register Parameter Definition Value

number
0 Command Logic function to establish/close 1: connect
a connection. 2...65535: disconnect
Disconnect command takes
effect if it changes between
2 and 65535.
1 Index Value in phone list in which are Range from 1...64
set telephone number, IP,
password, and user name - not
used for GPRS and PPPoE.
2 Command Execution status of Reg 0 0000 hex: idle
status command while establishing a 0001 hex: on going
connection. 0002 hex: OK
8001 hex: detected error - Invalid phone index
8002 hex: detected error - unable to initialize
8003 hex: detected error - unable to dial-out
8004 hex: detected error - unable to make a
PPP connection
8005 hex: detected error - unable to hang up (1)
3 Connection Status of the connection. 0: closed

status 1: open
1: This feature is available with firmware V1.7 or later.
NOTE: The command register are exchanged via the rack so the performance depends on CPU
scan period, the workload of the RTU protocol and the number of BMX NOR 0200 H modules
inserted in the rack.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 75
For PPP/Modem and PPPoE Link, another 4 registers (%MW) following above registers are used
to show local IP and remote IP address:
Register number Parameter Definition

4/5 Local IP IP address is stored as MSB.
6/7 Remote IP IP address is stored as MSB.
For example: %MW100 = 0A0B hex, %MW101= 0C0D hex, which means this IP is "10.11.12.13".
Example for modem register:
Register 3 Register 2 Reg 1 Reg 0 Comment Case

Connection Command status Index Command
status
0 0000 hex 0 0 original
0 0001 hex (on going) 1 1 connect (dial-out) OK

1 0002 hex (command OK) 1 1
0 0001 hex (on going) 1 1 connect (dial-out) NOK
0 8001 hex/8002 hex/8003 hex/8004 hex 1 1
1 0001 hex (on going) 1 2 disconnect (hang up) OK

0 0000 hex (idle) 1 2
1 0001 hex (on going) 1 2 disconnect (hang up) NOK
0 8001 hex/8002 hex 1 2
1 0001 hex (on going) 1 3 disconnect (repeat hang up) OK

0 0000 hex (idle) 1 3
1 0001 hex (on going) 1 3 disconnect (repeat hang) NOK
0 8001 hex/8002 hex 1 3
76 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modem Communication Error Codes
Introduction
In order to diagnose modem, error codes are available in Modem Diagnostic Web page.
Error Codes
The table below describes the modem communication error codes:
Value Bit Definition

00000100 hex 8 The phone index is not available in your phone list.
00000200 hex 9 PPP is not enabled when PSTN/GSM/GPRS modem is set.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 77
Connecting External Modem (RS232)
General
For an external modem, the RTS and CTS pins are connected directly (not crossed).
External modems are connected to a BMX NOR 0200 H module by a serial direct cable using an
RS232 physical link. BMX NOR 0200 H module works with many commercially available modems.
Application
The illustration below shows how a modem is connected to a slave BMX NOR 0200 H module
configured with PPP:
NOTE: In case of a PPPoE configuration, connect the modem on the Ethernet port of the
78 EIO0000000505 01/2016
RS 232 Serial Direct Cable

The TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 serial direct cable has two connectors:
RJ45 male,
Nine-pin SUB-D male.
The illustration below shows the pin assignment for a TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 serial direct cable:
Connecting Cables and Accessories

The table below shows the product references of the cables and adapters to be used according to
the serial connector used by the external modem:
Serial Connector for Data Circuit- Wiring

terminating Equipment
Nine-pin SUB-D female connector TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 cable
25-pin SUB-D female connector TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 cable
TSX CTC 09 adapter
EIO0000000505 01/2016 79
How to work with External Modem
Connection/Disconnection
After an external modem has been connected to a BMX NOR 0200 H module, use the website to
configure the module.
The main feature of the modem is the possibility to work in Permanent mode or in On-Demand
mode:
Permanent mode: the connection is automatically performed when the BMX NOR 0200 H
module is on power.
On-Demand mode: the connection or disconnection is performed depending on the command
register (see page 75).
Use the website to set a serial PPP connection.
NOTE: Do not forget to configure the serial port via the Website when the external modem is
connected to it.
NOTE: GPRS MODEM does not support server mode.
Dialing
In practice, the Dial-in/Dial-out depends of the module mode. There are two different cases:
The module is in Server/Slave mode: the modem connected to the module is in Dial-in mode.
The module is in Client/Master mode: the modem connected to the module is in Dial-out mode.
80 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Radio Modem User Cases
EIO0000000505 01/2016 81
PSTN Modem User Cases
82 EIO0000000505 01/2016
GPRS/GSM Modem User Cases
EIO0000000505 01/2016 83
ADSL Modem User Cases
84 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Functional Description
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Part IV
Introduction
This part describes the functionality of the BMX NOR 0200 H module.

7 How to Work with RTU Protocols 87
8 How to Work with Datalogging Service 123
9 How to Work with Email/SMS Service 135
10 How to Work with Embedded Web Pages 145
EIO0000000505 01/2016 85
86 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
How to Work with RTU Protocols
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapter describes the built-in RTU protocols characteristics for use in Telemetry and
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) applications.

Section Topic Page
7.1 RTU Protocols 88
7.2 Clock Synchronization 94
7.3 Time Stamping 99
7.4 Events Management 100
7.5 Integrity Poll Command 112
7.6 Transmission Modes 115
7.7 Connection Status 120
7.8 Communication Error Codes 121
EIO0000000505 01/2016 87
Section 7.1
RTU Protocols
RTU Protocols

Topic Page
Communication Protocols 89
IEC 60870-5-101/104 Protocols Overview 90
DNP3 Protocols Overview 92
88 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Communication Protocols
Introduction
This topic describes the characteristics of the supported RTU protocols.
Functions and Protocols

The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports these functions and protocols:
RTU protocols IEC 60870-5-101 (master or slave)

DNP3 NET (client or server)
Main RTU protocol time synchronization through a protocol facility or NTP
features balanced and unbalanced transmission mode
events management with time stamping
events queue stored in RAM memory (up to 100,000 events for all clients)
events data backfill to SCADA application via protocol facility
report by exception data exchanges
unsolicited messaging data exchanges
protocol setup via webpage
NOTE: The RTU protocol parameters are configured using the embedded webpages.
Limitations
The BMX NOR 0200 H module does not support multiple RTU protocols instances. Only one
instance at a time of an RTU protocol (IEC, DNP3) can be launched to work with Modbus TCP.
NOTICE
Use different address values for each session in a channel or for each section in a session.
Channel parameters must meet IEC60870-5-104 protocol requirements with these limitations:
T2 S Frame Period < T1 Ack Period and W Value < 2/3 K Value.
If you are using the DNP3 protocol, use successive DB mapping starting at 0.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 89
IEC 60870-5-101/104 Protocols Overview
Introduction
IEC 60870-5 is an international standard released in the early 1990s by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). This standard provides a communication profile for telecontrol,
teleprotection, and associated telecommunications characteristics for electric power systems. It is
widely used today for other infrastructures, including water applications in Europe and Asia.
The IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 protocols are companions to the IEC 60870-5
standards that relate to transmission protocols.
IEC 60870-5-101
The IEC 60870-5-101 protocol is based on the EPA (Enhanced Performance Architecture). This
protocol defines only the physical link and application layers of the OSI model. IEC 60870-5-101
is used primarily on serial links with relatively slow transmission media. This standard conforms to
baud rates of up to 9600 bit/s, although much higher baud rates (<115200 bit/s) are being used.
IEC 60870-5-104
The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is an extension of the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. There are
changes in transport, network, link & physical layer to open networking.
IEC 60870-5-104 enables communication between control stations and substations in a standard
TCP/IP network. The TCP protocol is used for connection-oriented data transmission. To have
connectivity to LANs and routers with different facilities (frame relay, etc.), connect it to the WAN.
The application layer of IEC 104 is the same as that of IEC 60870-5-101, except that some data
types and facilities are not used. There are separate link layers defined in the standard, which
facilitates the transfer of data over Ethernet and serial lines.
Supported Protocol Features

Features of the IEC 60870-5-101/104 protocols:
general interrogation
clock synchronization
events transmission (time-stamped or not)
balanced and unbalanced communications
counter interrogation
command transmission modes (select and execute mode)
90 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Supported Data Types

The IEC 60870-5-101/104 protocols include these data types:
discrete inputs/outputs (single or double)
measured values (with different formats)
integrated totals
commands
Protocol Characteristics
The table lists the characteristics for the supported RTU protocols:
IEC 60870-5-101 master up to 32 slaves (1 session for each slave and up to 5 sectors per session),
individual database definition for each sector
up to 5000-point database for all sectors including predefined commands
IEC 60870-5-101 slave up to 5000- point database for data objects of all supported types
up to 100,000-event queue for all data types
supports clock synchronization from a master, CPU or NTP
configurable data link address CAA (Common ASDU Address) and IOA
event time-stamping configurable by type (None, CP24, CP56)
IEC 60870-5-104 server client IP address validation list (up to 10 IP addresses)
up to 4 concurrent client connections with configurable TCP service port
(standard is 2404)
up to 5000-point database for data objects of all supported types
up to 100,000-event queue for all data types in all clients (each client has a
dedicated event buffer)
event time-stamping configurable by type (None, CP56)
configurable CAA (common ASDU address) and IOA
IEC 60870-5-104 client up to 5000-point database for all sectors including predefined commands
up to 64 servers connections supported
connections share common channel configuration
dedicated connection for each session and sector configuration
dedicated destination IP address and port settings for each connection
Interoperability Lists
The interoperability list (defined by the standard) facilitates interoperability between devices from
different manufacturers. In the list, the function range is described for each device by marking the
applicable functions.
NOTE: You can find BMX NOR 0200 H IEC interoperability list in Appendices. (see page 328)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 91
DNP3 Protocols Overview
Introduction
The distributed network protocol (DNP3) protocol was developed to achieve an open, standard
interoperability for communications between master stations, substation devices, RTUs, and
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs). DNP3 has been used primarily by utilities such as the electric
power industry in North America and has become widely used in other distributed infrastructures
such as water/wastewater, transportation and oil and gas industries.
DNP3 is based on the International Electrotechnical Commission Technical Committee 57
Working Group 03. The IEC TC57 WG03 has been working on the Enhanced Performance
Architecture (EPA), a protocol standard for telecontrol applications. Each of the EPAs 3 layers
corresponds to a layer on the OSI reference model.
DNP3 is specifically developed for inter-device communications that use SCADA RTUs. The
protocol facilitates both RTU-to-IED (Intelligent Electronic Device) and master-to-RTU/IED.
The protocol was originally designed for slow serial communications, but the current DNP3 IP
version also supports TCP/IP-based networking.
Supported Protocol Features

These are the main features that DNP3 supports:
clock synchronization
polled interrogations
polled report-by-exception
unsolicited report-by-exception
events transmission (time-stamped or not)
counter-specific treatment
master commands
Supported Data Types

The DNP3 protocol includes these data types:
discrete inputs/outputs (single or double)
measured values (with different formats)
integrated totals
commands
92 EIO0000000505 01/2016
The table lists the characteristics for the supported RTU protocols:
DNP3 master/DNP3 NET up to 32 slaves/servers (1 session for each slave/server)
client
up to 5000-point database for slaves data objects including predefined
commands
DNP3 slave/DNP3 NET up to 5000-point database for data type objects
server up to 100,000-event queue for all data types
supports clock synchronization from a master
service over client IP address validation list (up to 10 IP
TCP addresses)
4 concurrent client connections with configurable
TCP service port (default port is 20000)
Interoperability Lists
This implementation of DNP3 is fully compliant with DNP3 Subset Definition Level 3, which suits
larger RTU applications and offers practically the complete range of DNP3 functionality.
This standard defines interoperability between devices from different vendors. It includes a device
profile that describes the basic protocol functionalities supported by the device and an Implemen-
tation table that defines information objects and their representation supported by the device.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 93
Section 7.2
Clock Synchronization
Clock Synchronization
Overview
The BMX NOR 0200 H module provides 2 ways to synchronize the clock with the SCADA (master)
and the connected devices:
via the RTU protocol facilities
via the NTP protocol
NOTE: These clock synchronization methods are independent of one another. Configure your
application to avoid clock synchronization conflicts.
The clock synchronization service establishes time accuracy among devices clocks over a
network.

Topic Page
Clock Synchronization with the RTU Protocol Facilities 95
Clock Synchronization with the NTP Protocol 96
94 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Clock Synchronization with the RTU Protocol Facilities
Overview
One of the main features of the RTU is to manage events with time stamping. Time stamping
requires effective time synchronization.
Slave/Server
When acting as an IEC 60870-5-101/104 or DNP3 slave or server, the BMX NOR 0200 H module
can synchronize its clock with a master or client station (SCADA). When the module receives the
clock synchronization command, it updates its internal clock and posts the new value to the CPU.
This maintains a consistent time on the local rack.
Master/Client
When acting as an IEC 60870-5-101/104 or DNP3 master or client, the BMX NOR 0200 H module
sends clock synchronization commands to connected slaves. As with the case above, the clock is
initialized from the CPU when it starts up. It gets the new time from the CPU every time
master/client sends the time synchronization command.
NOTE: In a Modicon M580 PAC, it is mandatory to enable the NTP client to use the
Slave/Server and Master/Client

When acting as both a master/client or slave/server, the BMX NOR 0200 H module periodically
synchronizes its local time with that of the CPU through the rack.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 95
Clock Synchronization with the NTP Protocol
Features of the Service

The clock synchronization via NTP offers:
periodic time corrections obtained from the reference standard, for example, the NTP server
automatic switchover to a backup time server if a trouble occurs with the normal server system
local time zone configurable and customizable (including daylight saving time adjustments)
Controller projects use a function block to read the clock, a feature that allows events or variables
in the project to be time stamped.
In a Modicon M340 PAC, time stamping is accurate to:
5 ms typical
10 ms worst case
Clock Synchronization and Time Stamps

The BMX NOR 0200 H module sends a source clock synchronization signal to a M340 CPU. The
module firmware includes an NTP client, which provides clock synchronization. The synchroni-
zation process occurs as follows:
The NTP Client... Result

1 ... requests a clock synchronization The NTP server sends a signal.
signal from the NTP server over an
Ethernet network.
2 ... stores the time.
3 ... sends a message to the clock system The CPU updates its internal clock. The
counter in the CPU. CPU clock is now typically within 5 ms of the
NTP server, with a worst case of 10 ms.
Before the next clock synchronization
signal, the CPU clock is updated each ms
by an internal timer.
Use the R_NTPC function block (see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and
Processors, User Manual) in either MAST, FAST, or Interrupt sections to read the clock from the
PLC application.
96 EIO0000000505 01/2016
The CPUs on an Ethernet network should be synchronized with the same NTP server.
CPS CPU NO R NTP
Server
Clock Ethernet
System NTP Request
Network
Counter
NTP NTP Response
Client
R_NTPC M340 System

EN EN0
OUT1
OUT2
STATUS
Clock Synchronization Terms
Term Description of Service

local clock offset Accurate local time adjustments are made via a local clock offset. The
local clock offset is calculated as:
((T2 - T1) + (T4 - T3))/2
where:
T1 = time when NTP request is transmitted from the module
T2 = time when NTP server receives the request (provided by the
module in response)
T3 = time when the NTP server transmits the response (provided to
the module in the response)
T4 = time when NTP response is received by the module
time accuracy The local time margin is < 10 ms compared to the referenced NTP server
time.
typical: 5 ms
worst case: <10 ms
settling time Maximum accuracy is obtained after 2 updates from the NTP server.
polling period Accuracy depends on the polling period. Less than 10 ms of margin is
dependency achieved for polling periods of 120 ms or less. To obtain a high degree of
accuracy (when your network bandwidth allows), reduce the polling
period to a small valuefor example, a polling time of 5 s provides better
accuracy than a time of 30 s.
time zone The default format is universal time, coordinated (UTC). Optionally you
may configure the service to use a local time zonee.g., GMT+1 for
Barcelona or Paris
EIO0000000505 01/2016 97
Term Description of Service

daylight saving The module automatically adjusts the time change in the spring and fall.
time
leap second To compensate for the deceleration of the earth rotation, the module
automatically inserts a leap second in the UTC time every 18 months via
an international earth rotation service (IERS).
Leap seconds are inserted automatically as needed. When needed, they
are inserted at the end of the last minute in June or December, as
commanded by the NTP server.
Obtaining and Maintaining Accuracy

The time service clock starts at 0 and increments until the Ethernet network time is fully updated
from the module.
Model Starting Date

M340 with Unity Pro January 1, 1980 00:00:00.00
Clock characteristics:
Clock accuracy is not affected by issuing stop/run commands on the PLC
Clock updates are not affected by issuing stop/run commands on the PLC
Mode transitions do not affect the accuracy of the Ethernet network
Re initializing the Time Service Register

After a download or an NTP server swap, the status clock value associated with the time service
register in the CPU is re initialized.
Two polling periods elapse before an accurate time is re-established.
98 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Section 7.3
Time Stamping
Time Stamping
Event Time Stamping
Overview
BMX NOR 0200 H module provides two ways for time stamping of events:
Time stamping done at source in the Modicon M580 and M340 CPU (requires PLC
programming).
Time stamping done in the RTU module (no PLC programming required).
NOTE: Improved time stamping resolution can be obtained when performing the time stamping in
the PLC CPU. Time stamping resolution is basically depending on the CPU scan time and I/O
modules type.
Supported Time Formats

In IEC 101 the Time Format for events time stamping may be set to one of the following options:
CP56: 56-bit (default)
CP24: 24-bit
The 56-bit Time Format is an absolute time format, whereas the 24-bit Time Format is an
incremental time format that only specifies minutes and milliseconds. The IEC 104 protocol uses
56-bit time format.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 99
Section 7.4
Events Management
Events Management

Topic Page
Overview 101
Events Routing 104
Events Backup 109
100 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Overview
Introduction
The BMX NOR 0200 H module generates events on changes of state, handles events lists and
provides the following services:
The management of a buffer of events (time stamped or not), overall buffer (queue) size can be
up to 100,000 events (the maximum value is 100,000 from RTU 1.5).
NOTE: One dedicated event buffer is managed per client/master application (up to 4
client/master applications are supported).
Automatic event backfill to the SCADA or the master station via RTU protocol facility (on DNP3
and IEC 101/104).
For RTU slave configuration (DNP3 slave, IEC 60870-5-101 slave and IEC 60870-5-104 server),
each object type has an independent event queue setting. To generate an event, set an event
queue for the corresponding object type.
Event Generation
A dialog box is used to configure the event generation:
Object Group
Point Count
EIO0000000505 01/2016 101

Event Queue Setting Page

The user can map event queue status to CPU registers. The status for each event queue is a 32-
bit register (2 words in CPU). A higher word 1 means the event queue has overflowed. The lower
word is the number of events in the event queue.
From the Web site, select event mapping:
NOTE: When the events number exceeds the configured buffer size, events will be lost or
overwritten.
102 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Increasing Maximal Event Buffer Size

You can increase the maximum events buffer size from 10,000 to 100,000 (in case of one client
connection).
NOTE: All channels can support up to 100,000 events, but each point type only supports up to
65,535 events.
A dialog box is used to configure the maximum event count:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 103

Events Routing
Introduction
The events routing component allows events from sub stations to be routed to SCADA within one
To route events, one RTU master channel and at least one RTU slave channel are needed inside
the system. The solution is to create a logic RTU master and slave in a single BMX NOR 0200 H
module. In the logic master, points are created to represent points in sub stations, and in the logic
slave, points are created to simulate the behavior of points in sub stations. Events routing
component is responsible for collecting events in the logic master. These events are sent from sub
stations, and trigger the same events in the logic slave.
BMX NOR 0200 H module components:
NOTE: Routing capabilities are only possible within a single module.

There are no automatic routing capabilities between two BMX NOR 0200 H modules (a
slave/server and a master) configured in the same M340 PAC station.
In a hierarchical architecture, time stamped events are automatically transferred from low end
slave sub stations to the SCADA (or master) through the M340 PAC station. The automatic transfer
uses path-through events functionality with a single BMX NOR 0200 H module configured in both
slave and master.
Configuration
Configure the BMX NOR 0200 H module for event routing. Most of the BMX NOR 0200 H module
parameters are configured via webpages as are the event routing functions. There is no dedicated
webpage for the events routing function, this function is configured inside the data mapping
configuration pages.
NOTE: The BMX NOR 0200 H does not detect events for the routing points in slave.
NOTE: With the loss of power management, you can specify in the configuration if you want to poll
more events from the BMX NOR 0200 H modules, fallback to SCADA and prevent events from
being lost.
104 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Channel Configuration
For routing events, configure one master channel and at least one slave channel. One master
channel is required so that the system can connect with more sub slaves, and more slave channels
allow for more SCADA in the system.
Master Data Mapping Configuration

You must first add data points in the master channel. These points represent points in the sub slave
which communicate with the master channel.
Master points mapping:
When configuring these points in the master channel, select the events of the point which needs
to be routed, and route events to the corresponding slave channel.
For example, if the master channel needs to receive events from the sub slave Binary Input point,
routed it to the logic slave channel and so that becomes an event of the Binary Input point.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 105

Master points configuration:
NOTE:
When the user specifies one point in the master for event routing such as the binary input point,
one corresponding point configuration is automatically generated in the logic slave channel. The
point configuration is read only in the logic slave channel, and cannot be changed or removed
in its DB mapping panel.
If the channel number, session number, or point number mismatches in the slave channel, an
error page appears.
If the user chooses the route to the channel as None, this means that this point does not need
to be routed to a slave.
106 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Slave Points Configuration

After configuring the points in the master channel, the corresponding point is listed in the slave
channel.
Slave points mapping:
The points used to route are different from the normal points of the slave. The parameters (CPU
type, CPU address, variable name, and time stamp) of CPU mapping are no longer available, and
the available parameters are read only. Their lifetime is consistent with peer point
configuration in the master.
Slave points configuration:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 107

Channel Combination for Events Routing

To route events inside the BMX NOR 0200 H module, follow the configuration instructions
(see page 104) to combine the master channel and slave channel.
The supported combinations are:
Master channel Slave channel

DNP3 net client DNP3 net server
DNP3 serial master DNP3 net server
IEC-104 client IEC-104 server
IEC-101 master IEC-104 server
Limitations
Events are routed inside the module. This means that it is not possible to route events between
two or more modules and also that the PLC application in the CPU cannot get and process the
events (the CPU can still get the point value in events just like the standalone master channel).
Events and static points are routed. Requests (commands) from SCADA are not routed to the
sub slave. This means that inside the BMX NOR 0200 H module, there is no other data
exchange or communication between the master channel and the slave channel except for
events.
Not all master and slave channel combinations are supported by the routing function
(see page 104).
In the system, SCADA cannot communicate with sub slaves. The solution uses the logic slave
in the BMX NOR 0200 H module to simulate sub slaves, so SCADA can only communicate with
the logic the slave in the BMX NOR 0200 H module, and sub slave can only communicate with
the logic master in BMX NOR 0200 H module.
Some information related to events may be changed. Key information related to events like point
value, flag, and timestamp is kept during routing. Other information related to events like point
number, events class, and variation is changed according to the slave channel configuration.
Events Buffer Size

The events buffer of the slave must be greater than the events buffer in the sub slave otherwise
events are lost.
108 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Events Backup
Introduction
The BMX NOR 0200 H and RTU protocol have a maximal number of events buffer size of 100,000.
NOTE: The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports the backup of up to 10,000 events into Flash
memory on loss of power. Only the latest events are saved if the number of events is more than
10,000.
The event monitor component:
saves up to 10,000 events into Flash memory on loss of power,
reads events from the Flash memory when power is restored,
saves only the latest events if the size of the saved events exceeds 10,000,
can be configured to decide which events or data types need to be saved on loss of power.
Web Configuration
Event backup is a configurable feature for users. It can be enabled or disabled on the Web site as
shown in the picture below and it is disabled by default. This feature is set individually for each
channel and each data type. Only the events of the main channel are saved on loss of power. After
power restoration, the saved events can be restored into the main channel, and also the virtual
channels, which depend on Event Restore Mode configuration in the Web site. These
configurations take effect after a communication reset in the Web site or power recycle.
Configuration of event backup:
Event restore mode:

Event backup enable: Specifies whether the channel (IEC or DNP3 server/slave) supports
event backup if the module does not power up. It is only effective for the main channel.
Event restore mode: It has two options, main channel and all channels. Select the main
channel option if you want to add saved events into the event buffer of the main channel when
power restores, ignoring the virtual channel. Select the option all channels if you want to add
saved events into both the main channel and virtual channels when power restores.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 109

Events Time Quality: When restoring backup events after power restoration, the time quality is
forced to
invalid with Forcing Invalid
the original quality with Original Quality
NOTE: The box Event Backup Enable must be checked beforehand.

Configuration of event backup for DNP3:
Configuration of event backup for IEC 101 and IEC 104:
NOTE: When restoring events from the Flash into the event buffer after power restores, the
BMX NOR 0200 H module sorts the events according to the timestamps of the events.
Event Backup Behavior

The RTU has different backup behaviors in different cases. The type of case is defined from the
user point view:
Case Event
1 Loss of power power lost Saves events in non volatile
memory on loss of power
2 Power start power on/restore Restores events when the
RTU protocol starts
3 Protocol exit Unity Pro Ethernet configuration resets Does not save events when
RTU communication through Web site the protocol exits
RTU protocol cold/warm restart.
110 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Signature Authentication
Signature authentication is required when events are restored from the Flash memory. It checks if
the protocol configuration has changed during the power loss and restore. If the signature of the
XML configuration is different from the record in the Flash, all the events are deleted directly.
NOTE: The signature changes if the parameters of the channel/session/sector or Network
Type/IP/Port/Start Reg Addr/Connection Count have changed. The Modem/PPPoE/Serial
Port/Time Zone do not have an effect on the signature.
Limitations
If the events number to save exceeds the size of the Flash memory, the BMX NOR 0200 H module
saves only the latest events.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 111

Section 7.5
Integrity Poll Command
Introduction
Command DNP3 and Integrity Poll: Integrity poll retrieves all event (class 123) and static (Class
0) data from the device. It is typically sent after device restart, loss of communication, or on a
periodic basis to check data accuracy.
Command IEC and General Interrogation: The General Interrogation command retrieves all or
a specified group of static data. It is typically sent after device restart, loss of communication, or on
a periodic basis so that no changes are missed in the spontaneous data reporting.
Communication Behavior
The BMX NOR 0200 H module has three communication ports, one serial port, one Ethernet port,
and a backplane interface.
The serial port and the Ethernet port are mainly used to communicate with the remote master or
slaves with RTU protocols. The backplane interface is used to communicate with the CPU. The
main activity of the backplane interface is synchronizing data between CPU registers and the RTU
point database inside the module. The synchronization cycle can be one or more PLC application
scan cycles, depending on the data amount and backplane load.
112 EIO0000000505 01/2016

When Master Channel Receives Events from Sub Slave

When something significant changes in sub slave, such as a value of a point, the sub slave sent
out an event. The system receives this event and the event needs to be routed to SCADA system.
Events routing example:
1 Sub slave sends out events to the master channel.

2 Master channel updates the point values in the module and the database of the logic slave channel and
synchronizes the value to CPU registers.
3 Events are routed to slave channels according to point configuration.
4 Slave channel buffers these events and sends events to SCADA if communication link is established.
When Slave Channel Receives Request from SCADA

In the RTU system, SCADA sends requests (commands) like an Integrity Poll to slaves connected
to it. The slave channel receives this request and sends a response to SCADA. In the routing
system, the behavior of the slave channel is exactly the same as a standalone (without events
routing) slave channel. The master channel and sub slaves are not involved in this case.
Response to the request from SCADA example:
1 SCADA sends an Integrity Poll request to the slave channel.

2 Points values are synchronized cyclically between the database of the slave channel and CPU registers.
3 The slave channel responds to the SCADA request with the points value in the database.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 113

When Master Channel Sends Request to Sub Slave

The master channel can send requests to a sub slave connected to it, and a sub slave sends the
response back to as the master channel. The behavior of the master channel in this case is exactly
the same as a standalone master channel. The points in the logic slave channel should be
synchronized with the updated point in the master channel.
Send request to sub slave example:
1 PLC application in the M340 CPU sends a Integrity Poll command to the master channel.
2 The master channel send Integrity Poll request to the sub slave.
3 The sub slave responds to the request with the value of the latest points.
4 The logic slave data base is synchronized while the master channel updates the database.
5 Points value are synchronized cyclically between the database of the master channel and CPU registers.
114 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Section 7.6
Transmission Modes
Transmission Modes
Overview
Introduction
With DNP3 or IEC101/104 protocols, the BMX NOR 0200 H module manages different ways of
retrieving data with the following transmission modes:
balanced or unbalanced transmissions
polled interrogations
report by exception
unsolicited messaging
mix of the above methods
NOTE: For transmission modes setup, set the Advanced Parameters (see page 273) (DNP3).
Balanced and Unbalanced Mode

In the unbalanced transmission mode only the master station can initiate data transfer with the
remote devices by polling the slaves. In balanced transmission mode, both the master and slaves
can initiate data transfer.
Polled Interrogations
Polled Interrogations is the basic data exchange method. The master station requests data to
multiple RTU station devices by polling periodically the remote slaves.
Report by Exception
Report By Exception (RBE) provides optimized data transfer between master and slaves stations,
where only changes of data are reported, whereas in Polled Interrogations - the master station
periodically requests data to the slaves devices. RBE is particularly useful when using low rate
communication media (PSTN, GSM/GPRS) by reducing traffic overhead and transmission costs.
Unsolicited Messaging
Unsolicited Messaging is the basic data exchange method. The slave station initiates data
transmission even though the master station does not send poll interrogations.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 115

Parameters Dependency Link

Parameter dependency link table for IEC101/104:
Transmission Parameter Parameter Location Relationship With Transmission Mode

Mode Dependency
Balanced and Used IEC-101 Slave/Channel/ Unbalanced transmission mode: only
Unbalanced Mode Balanced IEC101 master station can initiate data
Mode transferring with the remote devices by polling
the slave. It means that slave keep silent unless
master request its response. RBE is not
recommended to use under this mode.
Balanced transmission: both the master and
slaves can initiate data transfer. IEC104 support
balanced mode by default thanks to TCP/IP.
Polled Groups IEC-101 Slave / It is to set group attributes of monitoring point. It
Interrogations Channel/Session/Sector/ is used to respond to the general Interrogations
Data Mapping/M_xxx with specific group of static data.
IEC-104 Server /
Channel/Session/Sector/
Data Mapping/M_xxx
Read Time IEC-101 Slave / It is used to specify the time stamp format in the
Format Channel/Session/Sector/ response to read command.
Parameter
NOTE: It is used for the points except
IEC-104 Server / measured points and counter.
Parameter
C_RD_NA IEC-101 Slave / It is used to specify the time stamp format in the
Measure and Channel/Session/Sector/ response to read command.
Time Format Parameter
NOTE: It is used for measured points
IEC-104 Server /
Parameter
C_IC_NA IEC-101 Slave / It is used to specify the time stamp format in the
Time Format Channel/Session/Sector/ response to read command.
Parameter
NOTE: It is used for counter.
IEC-104 Server /
Parameter
116 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Mode Dependency
Report By Max Event IEC-101 Slave / Event count is disabled by default. It is required
Exception Count Channel/Session/Sector/ to set explicitly for RBE.
Events/M_xxx When Event count is more than 0,
BMX NOR 0200 H save events into local buffer.
IEC-104 Server /
After connection is ON Line, the event is
Events/M_xxx reported automatically.
Delete Oldest IEC-101 Slave / It is used to manage event buffer overflow.

Event Channel/Session/Sector/ Delete the oldest one or newest one when buffer
Advanced Parameter overflow.
IEC-104 Server /
Advanced Parameter
Event IEC-101 Slave / It is used to specify whether this point is reported
Generation Channel/Session/Sector/ as event or not.
Data Mapping/M_xxx
NOTE: It must be checked for RBE.
IEC-104 Server /
This feature is available for BMX NOR 0200 H
module firmwareV1.7 or later.
Data Mapping/M_xxx
Parameter dependency link table for DNP3:

Mode Dependency
Balanced and Unsolicited DNP3 support balanced mode by default for both
Unbalanced Mode Message DNP3 and DNP3 NET. When DNP3 over Serial
feature Line, master need manage to enable/disable the
unsolicited message. In general, keep
unsolicited message managed by master or
disabled if master has multiple slave
communicated over serial line.
When DNP3 over TCP/IP, no such strict ion on
the management of unsolicited message thanks
to TCP/IP.
Polled Event Class DNP3 Slave / It is mandatory to enable Class 0 to respond to
Interrogations Mask Channel/Session/ Integrity Poll of controlling station.
Data Mapping/{Binary
NOTE: It is possible to read all data through
input/output/counter, Analog
Read Group no matter what class it is assigned.
input/output}
DNP3 NET Server /
Channel/Session/
Data Mapping/{Binary
input/output}
EIO0000000505 01/2016 117


Mode Dependency
Unsolicited Unsol Allowed DNP3 Slave / It is used to enable/disable unsolicited message
Message Channel/Session/ by controlling station.
(Report By Advanced Parameter For unsolicited message, it must be enabled.
Exception) Unselected Unsol Allowed is to control not to
DNP3 NET Server /
report event as unsolicited message, but the
Channel/Session/
Advanced Parameter events are able to report for integrity poll and
read group.
Max Event DNP3 Slave / Event count is disabled by default. It must be set
Count Channel/Session/ as enabled explicitly for unsolicited message.
Events /{Binary When Event count is more than 0,
input/output/counter, BMX NOR 0200 H saves events into local buffer
Analog input/output} which are able to report as unsolicited message
if unsolicited message is enabled, or respond to
DNP3 NET Server /
Channel/Session/ integrity poll and read group.
Events /{Binary
input/output}
Delete Oldest DNP3 Slave / It is used to manage event buffer overflow.
Event Channel/Session/ Delete the oldest one or newest one when buffer
Advanced Parameter overflow.
DNP3 NET Server /
Channel/Session/
Advanced Parameter
118 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Mode Dependency
Unsolicited Event Class DNP3 Slave / It is mandatory to assign one of Class 1,2,3 and
Message Mask Channel/Session/ Unsolicited for unsolicited message.
(Report By Data Mapping/{Binary BMX NOR 0200 H initiates unsolicited
Exception) input/output/counter, Analog messages as class according to unsolicited
input/output} message enabled by controlling station.
DNP3 NET Server / NOTE: It is possible to read all events through
Channel/Session/ Integrity Poll/Read Group no matter whether
Data Mapping/{Binary unsolicited message is enabled or not.
input/output}
Unsol Class x DNP3 Slave / It is used to specify the maximal number of
Max Event Channel/Session/ events in the corresponding class to be allowed
{x=1,2,3} Advanced Parameter before an unsolicited response is generated if
unsolicited message is enabled.
DNP3 NET Server /
Channel/Session/ NOTE: Once one class matches the maximal
Advanced Parameter number of events, the events of all classes
enabled are sent out.
Unsol Class x DNP3 Slave / It is used to specify the maximal amount of time
Max Delay Channel/Session/ after an event in the corresponding class is
{x=1,2,3} Advanced Parameter received before an unsolicited response is
generated if unsolicited message is enabled.
DNP3 NET Server /
Channel/Session/ NOTE: Once one class matches the maximal
Advanced Parameter amount of time after event generation, the
events of all classes enabled are sent out.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 119

Section 7.7
Connection Status
Connection Status
Overview
Introduction
The connection status of each channel of the module is put in a double-word descriptor that is
mapped to the CPU memory of your PLC program facility.
Word Mapping
You assign a valid CPU memory address to which the connection status descriptor is to be
mapped.
NOTE: For IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP3 server witch configured to connect with more than one
client, each client has an independent connection status, and they store in sequence in CPU
memory.
The descriptor occupies 2 consecutive CPU memory words. The following tables show the
information that the connection status descriptor contains.
Bit 31 Bit 30...Bit 1 Bit 0

Session #31 session #30...session #1 session #0
For the IEC 60870-5-101in balanced mode and the DNP protocol, the connection status
descriptors are set to 1 to indicate that all slaves are connected. Then the corresponding bit is reset
to 0 after the command is sent without the reception of a valid response.
NOTE: If connection status really matters, configure parameter "Test Frame Period" with a none
zero value for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, "Link Status Period" for DNP3 protocol
120 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Section 7.8
Communication Error Codes
Communication Error Codes
RTU Protocols Communication Error Codes
Introduction
In order to diagnose RTU communication, error codes are available in RTU diagnostic Web page.
Error Codes
The table below describes the RTU protocols communication error codes:
Value Definition
00000001 hex Total count of data points in all channels exceeds 5000.
00000002 hex Total count of data points' event in one protocol exceeds 100,000.
00000004 hex The accessed register (M%, %S, MW%, %SW) address exceeds CPU
register's range.
00000008 hex The size of unlocated variable / array exceeds 1000 bytes.
00010000 hex Unlocated variable is not defined in CPU.
00020000 hex Time zone collision between NTP and RTU.
01000000 hex Data base of RTU protocol is not initialized successfully.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 121

122 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
How to Work with Datalogging Service
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 8
Introduction
This chapter describes the Datalogging Service and explains how to configure it.

Topic Page
About Datalogging Service 124
Create a Datalogging Service 126
Datalogging Properties 127
Datalogging Configuration 129
Datalogging File Format 133
Recommendation on Datalogging Service 134
EIO0000000505 01/2016 123

About Datalogging Service
Service Description
The datalogging service allows application data archiving (events, alarms, process data, devices
status, measures, etc.) in the internal memory of the BMX NOR 0200 H module. This service
allows you to log data into CSV files in the ASCII format. CSV files are stored locally in the SD
memory card of the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
Datalogging can be performed either periodically or when a specific event (configured by the user)
occurs. CSV files are directly usable by an MS Excel spreadsheet or a database management
system (DBMS). The CSV files can also be sent through FTP or attached to an email (using the
email service) that is automatically sent to specified users. CSV files can also be accessed by an
FTP client.
Any FTP client can access the module's file system. You can specify a URL to automatically send
information to a remote FTP server.
NOTE: The datalogging service is configured using Web Designer software.
Service Principles
Datalogging is performed in the RAM memory of the BMX NOR 0200 H module to backup the SD
card memory.
The datalogging service can manage up to 10 groups of datalogging files (tables). This allows for
the archiving of several different tables of data, each associated with a different logging period.
Datalogging files can be backed up, periodically or on event, from the RAM memory to non-volatile
memory of the module (on the SD memory card) into history files in the CSV format. For example,
Table_n.csv represents the last backup file, and history files are renamed as Table_n.cs0,
Table_n.cs1, etc.
CSV files can be purged on the SD memory card by an event trigger.
Characteristics
Remember:
To prolong the life of the SD card, Schneider-Electric recommends you not to backup
datalogging files more frequently than every 30 minutes.
The time that each data logging instance occurs is not precise.
Back up any log files that are stored in the module's volatile memory to enable the restoration
of lost data.
When power is lost during datalogging, the file that is being backed up is lost.
124 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Datalogging Service Codes
Value Comment
0 OK
2 The current file .csv is renamed .cs0.
10 The module cannot reach a variable that should be logged
because:
the variable does not appear in the namespace.
the variable is not write enabled.
the preceding value has not been updated yet.
11 FTP transfer interruption.

12 The URL specified for FTP cannot be accessed.
13 The internal flash is full.
14 The internal RAM is full.
15 The module cannot write on the media specified.
16 The module cannot access the namespace.
17 The maximum number of tables has been reached
(10 maximum) in your .xml file.
18 The maximum number of variables has been reached in a
table.
19 The service is empty, no table defined.
NOTE:
The datalogging service code 2 should be considered as a status.
The highest values have the priority. The datalogging service code 17 has priority over the
datalogging service code 12. When the datalogging service code17 has been corrected, the
datalogging service code 12 can then be sent to the variable declared for the status of the
database service
The values of the table status variable are identical to the values of the datalogging service
status variable.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 125

Create a Datalogging Service
Procedure
Follow these steps to create a datalogging service:
Step Action
1 Click the name of your project in the browser.
2 To add the new service:
click Project New Service or,
right-click Services in the browser, then click New Service.
Result: the following window appears.
3 Select datalogging in the Service Type listbox.

4 Enter the service name or click Finish to keep the name by default.
5 The datalogging service has been created.
126 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Datalogging Properties
Properties Tab
Initiate datalogging with a right-click on the service folder, then scroll to create a new service. Enter
a name for the new datalogging service
Backup Parameters:
Fields Function
Global backup When checked, the tables use the same event to trigger a backup.
When not checked, each created table has its own event to trigger a
back up.
NOTE: When a Global backup check box is ticked, the fields
use of a trigger and use of a timer become available.
use of a trigger Provide the name of a variable to trigger variable logging on an event
associated to this variable.
NOTE: Select the type of your trigger in the drop down menu
available on the left.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 127

Fields Function
use of timer Provide a periodic time base to trigger variable logging on an event.
Media target SD card to store the information on the SD card of the module
Log maximum size Specify the maximum size of memory allocated to the backup files.
The maximum log file size is defined for each media via the drop
down menu, but the value can be changed. For more information,
refer to Datalogging Limitations.
Path Provide the destination path for the media selected.
Purge Parameters:
Fields Function
Use of a trigger If checked, this event triggers a purge of the current backup files on
all media currently in use.
NOTE: Select the type of your trigger in the drop down.
Service Properties Parameters:
Fields Function
Service status Selects the variable with the associated event that is to be used as a
variable trigger to check the status of the Datalogging service.
128 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Datalogging Configuration
Configuration Tab
The datalogging service does not operate properly if the project is not synchronized with the latest
build of Unity Pro project before configuring datalogging service.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED DATA LOGGING OPERATION
Synchronize the project with the latest build of Unity Pro project before configuring datalogging
service.
damage.
This figure shows the Configuration tab for datalogging:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 129

Log Tables
Log Tables Parameters:
Fields Function
Log Tables List of the current log tables stored in the module. It is possible to:
Create a new log file using the Add button,
Remove a log file using the Remove button,
Duplicate a log file using the Duplicate button.
Table Parameters
Table Parameters:
Fields Function
Table name Name of the log file that contains the data you have configured.
Table status Determine the status of the table.
variable
Enable logging By selecting this check box and defining an associated variable in the Enable logging
variable, the table can only perform actions such as: log data, backup, purge or FTP
when the associated variable is set to a value other than zero and when the trigger is
activated.
NOTE: Select the type of trigger in the drop down menu.
Log Parameters
Log Parameters:
Fields Function
Use of a trigger / To trigger logging of variables, configure an event in the Use of a trigger / timer
timer variable. This event is either:
a periodic event (use of a timer), in which case you need to set a time base
an event associated with a variable (use of a trigger), in which case you need to
provide the name of this variable (for example, plc.Device0.Pressure1).
NOTE: Select the type of trigger in the drop down menu.
Erase on restart Selecting this check box deletes the table log files on restart of the module.
Erase Table on Selecting this check box removes the previous logs in the table after backup, so the
Backup table restarts empty.
Timestamp Selecting this box records in the log file Timestamp (hour and date) for each event.
Note: Timestamps are mandatory if you want to use the log file for a Datalogging
History.
Optimized log Selecting this box compacts the log file format (see page 133) of the .csv file. In this
format case, the variable name does not appear in each record.
Maximum record Configures the maximum of records that can be stored in a log file. If that number is
number reached, new records overwrite old records.
130 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Log Variables
Log Variables Parameters:
Fields Function
Log variables The variable name part lists the variables (PLC/devices or Calculation
variables) that are stored in the log file.
It is possible to:
Create a new log variable using the Add button
Remove a log variable using the Remove button
NOTE: The BMX NOR 0200 H module does not support variables that extract one bit from
a word (for example a variable extracting %MW100.1 is not supported).
Backup Parameters
Backup Parameters:
Fields Function
Use of a trigger / To trigger logging of variables, configure an event in the
timer Use of a trigger / timer variable. This event is either:
a periodic event (use of a timer), in which case you need to set a
time base
an event associated with a variable (use of a trigger), in which
case you need to provide the name of this variable (for example,
calculation.calculation1.Pressure1).
The use of a trigger and use of a timer fields are grayed-out
depending whether the Global backup check box from the
datalogging properties windows (see page 127) is ticked or not.
NOTE: Select the type of trigger in the drop-down menu.
Media target Use to define the media target to use.
Maximum file Defines the maximum number of CSV files to use for each table. By
number default it is set to 10. The maximum authorized value is 100. The last
file is the .csv file, the previous is the .0 file, and the oldest is the .8 file.
Status variable Determine the status of the Backup action. The status is set to 0 when
the service starts, to 1 when the backup action begins, and to 2 when
the backup action completes.
Log estimated Provides information on the time length of the log based on the
time maximum file number, the logging and backup period. It is only
available when using a timer.
Log maximum size Provides the maximum log size. This field can be changed via the
backup parameters in the datalogging Properties Screen
(see page 127).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 131

Purge Parameters
Purge Parameters:
Fields Function
Use of trigger Specifies the event that triggers the purge.
Status Variable Determine the status of the Purge action. The status is set to 0 when
the service starts, to 1 when the purge action begins, and to 2 when the
purge action completes.
FTP Settings
FTP Settings:
Fields Function
FTP trigger Specifies the event that triggers sending the selected table log files
(CSV file) via FTP.
FTP address The address of the remote FTP server.
Status Variable Determine the status of the FTP action. The status is set to 0 when the
service starts, to 1 when the FTP action begins, and to 2 when the
FTP action completes.
Login and Login parameters for the remote FTP server access.
Password
132 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Datalogging File Format
Summary
The file format is fixed and cannot be modified by the user. The file is encoded in pure ASCII format
in a text file with a .csv extension. (Microsoft Excel can open .csv files.)
Examples
Example of a log file:
2003-10-01
02:44:55;plc.plc1.height;150;plc.plc1.length;200;plc.plc1.width;50;
2003-10-01
03:48:08;plc.plc1.height;140;plc.plc1.length;150;plc.plc1.width;30;
2003-10-01 04:55:10;
plc.plc1.height;220;plc.plc1.length;280;plc.plc1.width;80;2003-10-01
06:01:05; plc.plc1.height;170;plc.plc1.length;220;plc.plc1.width;60;
Example of an optimized log file:
Date;plc.plc1.height;plc.plc1.length;plc.plc1.width;
2003-10-01 02:44:55;150;200;50;2003-10-01 03:48:08;140;150;30;2003-10-
01 04:55:10;220;280;80;2003-10-01 06:01:05;170;220;60;
EIO0000000505 01/2016 133

Recommendation on Datalogging Service
Size of the Log File

The following table shows you an estimation of the log file size in bytes depending on the number
of variables logged and the number of logs:
Number of logs Number of variables

1 2 5 10 20 50 100
1 65 110 245 470 920 2270 4520
2 130 220 490 940 1840 4540 9040
5 325 550 1225 2350 4600 11350 22600
10 650 1100 2450 4700 9200 22700 45200
20 1300 2200 4900 9400 18400 45400 90400
50 3250 5500 12250 23500 46000 113500 226000
100 6500 11000 24500 47000 92000 227000 452000
134 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
How to Work with Email/SMS Service
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 9
Introduction
This chapter describes the Email/SMS Service and explains how to configure it.

Topic Page
About the Email Service / SMS Service 136
Create an Email Service 138
Email Properties 139
Email Configuration 141
EIO0000000505 01/2016 135

About the Email Service / SMS Service
Presentation
The BMX NOR 0200 H module can automatically and dynamically send email or SMS to alert
specified users to:
alarm notifications
maintenance reminders
production reports
plant status updates
other process information
The email service enables you to create various email notifications (including recipients names,
email addresses, message subject, email body and attached files).
The body of an email can include fixed text messages, hyperlinks, file attachments, and real-time
application values that are dynamically integrated into the email at the moment the email is sent
by the module. The file can be attached to the email (for example, a datalogging file generated by
the datalogging service).
SMS messages may also be sent to mobile phones if you are using a GSM modem or if the client
email server has the capability. SMS is a dedicated configuration of the email service. Email or
SMS are sent when predefined application or process event is triggered.
NOTE: The Email / SMS service is configured using Web Designer software.
NOTE: The SMS feature is supported only when a GSM or GPRS modem is configured. The SMS
is sent only when the modem connection is not open.
Service Requirements
The email service provides only an SMTP client interface. The email service client connects to a
local or remote SMTP server to distribute the mail to its recipients.
A local SMTP server has to be installed at the site where the BMX NOR 0200 H module is installed.
A remote SMTP server may be available from your email provider.
The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports authentication functions in order to connect to the SMTP
server of the provider. The module can communicate directly through SMS to a destination mobile
phone without the installation of specific devices on the network.
136 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Service Operation
The email service acts as an SMTP client. When the preconfigured event trigger occurs, the
BMX NOR 0200 H module uses SMTP (over TCP port number 25) to send the email notification
to the SMTP server. That server is connected to the plant network or to the Internet, thereby
allowing the message to reach the destination recipients.
NOTE: Even though notifications are sent automatically after an event is triggered, there may be
a significant delay before the recipient gets the message. A notification sent to a mobile phone is
received only when the phone is on and within the coverage area. Therefore, this service should
only be used for non-critical notifications, such as maintenance reminders or production reports.
Email and SMS Service Values
Value Comment
0 The service is in stop mode.
1 The service is in run mode.
10 e-mail refused by SMTP server.
11 e-mail not sent, due to a connection interruption.
12 No more connections or queue saturated.
The highest values have the priority. The service value 12 has the priority but becomes 11
subsequently. The service value 11 disappears once the email has been sent correctly.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 137

Create an Email Service
Procedure
This table describes the creation of an email service:
Step Action
1 Click the name of your project in the browser.
2 To add the new service you can:
Click Project New Service or,
Right-click Services in the browser, then click New Service.
Result: the following window appears:
3 Select Email in the Service Type list box.

4 Enter a service name or click on Finish to keep the name by default.
5 The email service has been created.
Security
The email service supports SMTP server authentications. The SMTP server allows PLAIN or
LOGIN authentication. Other authentication protocols are not supported. This optional login
password is authenticated by the SMTP mail.
138 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Email Properties
Properties Tab
This figure shows the available properties on the email tab:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 139

This table describes the parameters on the Properties tab:
Field Parameter Description

SMTP server SMTP server address This is the address of the SMTP server.
SMTP server port This is the TCP port used by the SMTP server (generally port 25).
Secure authentication Select this box if authentication is required to access the SMTP server.
Login This is the login for SMTP server access.
Password This is the password to access the SMTP server.
Sender This is the email address of the message sender.
Reply Address This is the email address to which a reply will be sent when you click
Reply.
Module Maximum size of send This is the maximum number of emails that can be stored in the buffer's
queue memory before being sent.
Time before retry to send This is the delay before emails stored in the buffer memory are re-sent
(in seconds) after the detection of an undelivered email.
Service Service status variable Use this parameter to determine the status of the email service.
When the maximum number of mails is reached (100), no further messages are stored.
Limitation
The number of messages you can configure in the project is restricted to 100.
NOTE: The SMTP server allows PLAIN or LOGIN authentication. Other authentication protocols
are not supported.
140 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Email Configuration
Configuration Tab
Email configuration screen:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 141

This table describes the parameters on the Configuration tab:
Parameter Description
SendSMS Check this box to indicate that the service can be configured to send an
SMS message.
Identifier* The email address of the message sender
Trigger* The event that triggers the email
Type NY: (notify): triggered by a bit status change or word value change
RE: (rising edge): triggered by a bit's rising edge or an increasing word
value
FE: (falling edge): triggered by a bit's falling edge or a decreasing word
value
BQ: (bad quality): triggered when the trigger status is of poor quality
Destination* Email address(es) of the receiver(s) of the message
Subject A brief summary of the message's contents
Contents Type the content of the message in this area.
Source Select the source from which the attached file comes.
Path Specify the path of the file.
*These parameters are required to record and save an email.
Dynamic Data
The email service enables you to include dynamic data in the body of the email. You can include
dynamic data manually or automatically:
manual: Place brackets before and after the variable name. For instance, to learn the value of
the value1 variable created in the device service, type write {plc.plc1.value1}. (You
can include comments before and after the brackets.)
automatic: Double-click the location to which you want to include dynamic data. When the
lookup table appears, you can select the variables that will appear in the email.
142 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Configuring European SMS Format

Before sending an SMS, you must configure the parameters from the Modem GSM window, as
shown below:
The Modem GSM parameter settings available:
Parameter Value Scope Default Value Description

Init AT CMD ATE0Q0S=1&D0&S0&C0 A custom AT command is
specified by user. This
command initializes the
modem.
PIN Code 4-8 digits 0000 PIN code for the SIM card
SMS Service phone number The number of the SMS
Center whose length service center.
depends on
service supplier
SMS Type PDU_7bits/ PDU_7bits Specifies how the SMS
PDU_8bits message will be encoded
NOTE: This
and sent:
parameter is
If encoded as 7bits, the
supported from
message will be sent as
firmware V1.6.
a text message.
If encoded as 8bits, the
message will be sent as
a data message.
NOTE: This parameter is
supported on most mobile
telephones.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 143

144 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
How to Work with Embedded Web Pages
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 10
Introduction
This chapter discusses the embedded web pages that are hosted by the BMX NOR 0200 H Web
serve.
The built-in HTTP server (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) allows remote and local access to the
embedded Web pages through standard browsers such as Internet Explorer or Firefox Navigator.

Section Topic Page
10.1 Embedded Web Pages 146
10.2 Home Web Page 147
10.3 Setup Web Pages 148
10.4 Diagnostics Web Pages 154
10.5 Monitoring Web Pages 166
EIO0000000505 01/2016 145

Section 10.1
Embedded Web Pages
Embedded Web Pages
Introduction to Embedded Web Pages
Overview
The BMX NOR 0200 H module has a built-in Web server that provides various Web pages offering
setup, diagnostic and monitoring features.
Browser and Java version requirements:
Browser and Java Requirement

Internet Explorer V6
Mozilla Firefox V40
Java V1.8.0
146 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Section 10.2
Home Web Page
Home Web Page
Home Page
Introduction
Access the BMX NOR 0200 H module Home page by entering the IP address or URL of the
module in a web browser. (No password is required to display the Home page.)
Home Page
From the Home page, you can access the following pages:
Monitoring (see page 167)
Diagnostics (see page 155)
Setup (see page 149)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 147

Section 10.3
Setup Web Pages
Setup Web Pages

Topic Page
Module Setup 149
Security 151
FTP Security Page 153
148 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Module Setup
Setup Overview
Setup Web pages allow the configuration of the following functions:
Serial port setup
Modem setup
RTU protocol setup
Security password setup
Export/import setup files
Setup Page
From the BMX NOR 0200 H module Home page, click the Setup link to display this page:
NOTE:
The user name and password must be typed when the first time log on setup page:
user name: USER
password: USER
EIO0000000505 01/2016 149

Links
You can access these pages directly from the Setup page:
Export/Import files (see page 208)
Security (see page 151)
FTP (see page 153)
NOTE: The Setup menu is explained in the Configuration with the Web Site (see page 192) topic.
150 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Security
Introduction
Access this page with the Security link on the Setup page (see page 149). Use the Security page
to:
modify the user name and the password for accessing the index page
modify the password for writing variables in the data editor (You can read the data editor values
without a password.)
The maximum size of the user name or passwords is 15 characters (non-extended ASCII).
Security Page
The security page appears:
HTTP access rights
Username :
New password :
Confirm password :
Change Password
Data Editor Write Password
Data Editor Write Password:
New Write password :
Confirm write password :
Change Write Password
Copyright 1998-2010,Schneider Automation SAS,All Rights Reserved.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 151

Modify the HTTP access rights:
Step Action
1 Enter the new username. (The default value of this field is: USER.)
2 Enter the new password. (The default value of this field is: USER.)
3 Confirm the new password by entering it again.
4 Confirm the modification using the Change Password button.
Modify the Data Editor Write Password:
Step Action
1 Enter the current password (case sensitive). (The default value of this field is: USER.)
2 Enter the new password (default is USER).
3 Confirm the new password by entering it again.
4 Confirm the modification with the Change Write Password button.
152 EIO0000000505 01/2016

FTP Security Page
Introduction
You can modify the username and password for FTP access rights on this page.
NOTE: You can download Web pages to the C type memory card over FTP.
FTP Page
The Setup page (see page 149) has a link to the FTP password page:
Follow these steps to modify the FTP username and password:
Step Action Comment

1 Enter the Username. The default is USER.
2 Enter the New password. The default is USER.
3 Confirm the New password. Enter the new password again.
4 Confirm the modification using the
Change Password button.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 153

Section 10.4
Diagnostics Web Pages
Diagnostics Web Pages

Topic Page
Diagnostics 155
PLC Rack Viewer Page 156
Messaging 158
NTP Diagnostics 159
Clock Diagnostics 161
Statistics 162
Upload MIB File 164
Properties 165
154 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Diagnostics
Diagnostics Page
From the BMX NOR 0200 H module Home page, click the Diagnostics link to display this page:
Links
From the BMX NOR 0200 H Diagnostics page, you can access the following pages:
RTU Protocol: See the description for the RTU Connection and Clock Diagnostics
(see page 161).
Rack viewer: See the description for the Rack Viewer page (see page 156).
Ethernet: You can diagnose the status of Ethernet services through these links:
Messaging (see page 158)
Statistics (see page 162)
NTP (see page 159)
Upload MIB file (see page 164)
Modem: See the description for the PPP / Modem and PPPoE Statistics Page (see page 163).
Clock: See the description for the RTU Connection and Clock Diagnostics (see page 161).
Memory: See the description for the System Memory Statistics Page (see page 163).
Properties: See the description for the Properties Diagnostics (see page 165).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 155

PLC Rack Viewer Page
Introduction
The Rack Viewer page allows you to carry out diagnostics on the modules in the local rack
configuration that includes the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
Click the module in the configuration to obtain a set of diagnostic information on this module:
LED status display
module type and the version of the module and its rack position
information that is specific to module functions
Rack Viewer Page

Follow these steps to access the rack display page from the Home page:
Step Action
1 Click the Diagnostics link.
2 Click the Rack Viewer link.
The rack display page appears:
156 EIO0000000505 01/2016

EIO0000000505 01/2016 157

Messaging
Diagnostics Page
Click this link to see the current information on the open TCP connection on port 502.
The number of sent/received messages on the port can be found at the top of this page. A table
provides, for each connection (numbered from 1 to 64):
Remote address
remote IP Address
Remote Port
remote TCP port
Local Port
local TCP port
Mess. Sent
number of messages sent from this connection
Mess. Received
number of messages received from this connection
Error Sent
error number on this connection
158 EIO0000000505 01/2016

NTP Diagnostics
NTP Diagnostic Page

Use the NTP link on the Diagnostics page to access NTP information:
Links
This page displays the information related to the NTP service:
NTP Status: The service is correctly configured.
NTP Server Status: This field indicates if the NTP client is connected to the NTP server and if
the server is primary or redundant.
NTP requests: This is the total number of client requests sent to the NTP server.
NTP responses: This is the total number of server responses sent from the NTP server.
NTP errors: This is the total number of NTP request that did not get a response.
Last error: This is the last detected error code received by the NTP client.
Date: This is the date format (D/M/Y).
Time: This is the time.
Time zone: This is the time zone (according to UTC).
DST status: This is the daylight saving time.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 159

Error Codes
Code Description
0 The component is OK and is executing.
1 There is either too much traffic or a server overload.
3 Incorrect configuration parameters were detected.
4 A disabled component was detected.
9 An incorrect IP address was detected.
14 The Time zone file is missing.
15 There was a detected syntax error in the custom rules file.
160 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Clock Diagnostics
RTU Clock
Use the Diagnostics page to access the RTU clock information:
Example of RTU clock:
Type Name Value/scope Description

Clock Status Synchronized yes/no 10.0.0.1
Current Data and Date 4/12/2010 RTU date
Time
Time 18:06:59 RTU time
Latest Time Date 4/12/2010 timestamp of
Synchronization synchronization
Time 18:06:59 timestamp of
synchronization
Time Source Controlling Station/ time source of
CPU Module/NTP server synchronization
Time Source
This page displays the information related to the clock status:
None: If no RTU protocol is configured, the BMX NOR 0200 H clock is free running, its time is
from 1970/1/1.
CPU Module: If the RTU protocol is configured, the BMX NOR 0200 H can get the initial time
from the CPU when the RTU protocol starts/restarts.
Controlling Station: If SCADA or master synchronizes time with the BMX NOR 0200 H, its
time source is the Controlling Station.
NTP server: If the NTP client is enabled and connected with the NTP server, its time source is
the NTP server when it synchronize the BMX NOR 0200 H module clock.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 161

Statistics
Ethernet Statistics Page

The statistic page displays Ethernet informations from the module such as state, transmit statistics,
collision, receptions...
Use the Statistics link on the Diagnostics page to access the Ethernet statistics:
RTU Connection Page

Use the Diagnostics page to access the RTU protocol statistics:
162 EIO0000000505 01/2016

PPP / Modem and PPPoE Statistics Page

Use the Statistics link on the Diagnostics page to access the PPP / modem and PPPoE statistics:
Status PPPoE Status

Modern PSTN Mode CLIENT
Mode CLIENT Connection INACTIVE
Connection INATCIVE Local PPPoE Address NA
Phone number 8767
InitAT Cmd NA
IP address
Local PPP address NA
Remote PPP address NA
System Memory Statistics Page

Use the Statistics link on the Diagnostics page to access the system memory statistics:
CPU Module
Number of %M 32634
Number of %MW 32464
Memory
Free memory size 50486600
EIO0000000505 01/2016 163

Upload MIB File
File Download Dialog

When you select Upload MIB File, the File Download dialog box appears. You are asked if you
want to save the MIB file or open it:
164 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Properties
Properties Page
Use the Properties link on the Diagnostics page to access the module properties:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 165

Section 10.5
Monitoring Web Pages
Monitoring Web Pages

Topic Page
Monitoring 167
Data Editor 168
166 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Monitoring
Monitoring Page
From the BMX NOR 0200 H module home page, click the Monitoring link to display this page:
Links
You can access these pages directly from the Monitoring page:
Data Editor: Use the Data Editor to access the CPU data.
Data Editor Lite: This smaller version of the Data Editor loads faster, and can access most of
the CPU data.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 167

Data Editor
Data Editor Page

Use the Data Editor to create variables animation tables. These tables are animated to display the
variable values.
Variables that can be written are accessible only by trained personnel (password protect).
WARNING
UNINTENDED OPERATION
Apply password protection to limit access to the Data Editor.
damage.
From the Monitoring tab, select the Data Editor link to view this screen:
The data editor is dynamic. Tables can be created on the Web Designer and transferred to the
module, or they can be directly created in the website by selecting variables from the namespace
or user manual inputs.
Data Editor Lite

The Data Editor Lite is similar to the Data Editor. The Lite version has restrictions related to
available data types and is dedicated to modem connection (slow Ethernet connection). It allows
a faster download than with the data editor. From the Monitoring tab, select the Data Editor Lite
link to view the screen.
168 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Configuring the Module
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Part V
Introduction
This part describes the configuration of the BMX NOR 0200 H module.

11 Configuring the Module 171
12 Configuration and Debug with Unity Pro 173
13 Configuration with the Setup Web Pages 187
14 Web Designer Configuration 317
EIO0000000505 01/2016 169

170 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 11
Configuration Methodology
Overview
Follow these main steps to configure the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
Step Action Comment

1 Set up the PLC hardware configuration through Configure the BMX NOR 0200 H module in the
Unity Pro. PLC rack. Set the Ethernet parameters and assign
a valid IP address (see page 192).
2 Log in to the module website and set the module Any configuration parameter changes require a
and protocol parameters and the data object module reset.
mapping.
3 Export the module website and protocol parameter This creates a backup of the configuration
configuration to a local storage media (*.XML file) parameters.
(see page 208)
4 Export the data object mapping to a local storage Export is done as a *.XSY file, ready for
media. Unity Pro import. (see page 208)
5 Import the *.XSY file into the Unity Pro application. This allows you to import the RTU data such as
unlocated variables as symbols for PLC
programming.
6 Complete the PLC application program. Consider your application requirements,
scan time, etc.
7 Download the application to the PLC. The RTU functionalities are ready to use.
8 BMX NOR 0200 H firmware: The new configuration is effective.
< V1.7: Click 'Reset Communication' in the
webpage.
V1.7: RTU protocol is automatically reset,
event buffer is cleared.
NOTE: Repeat these steps to refresh the variable definitions in Unity Pro when the data object
mapping list is modified.
NOTE: This module does not have an internal RAM backup function. The RAM is erased when the
power is switched off.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 171

Optional Configuration
Web Designer configuration software is used to setup the X80 device variable list and additional
functions, such as datalogging, email services, and data table lists.
172 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Configuration and Debug with Unity Pro
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 12
Introduction
The configuration or debugging the configuration of the BMX NOR 0200 H module relies on the
hardware module configuration through Unity Pro software.

Section Topic Page
12.1 Configuration with Unity Pro 174
12.2 Debugging with Unity Pro 180
EIO0000000505 01/2016 173

Section 12.1
Configuration with Unity Pro
Configuration with Unity Pro

Topic Page
Configuring with Unity Pro 175
Configuration Screen 178
174 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Configuring with Unity Pro
Module Reference
Find the module reference (BMX NOR 0200 H) in Unity Pro:
Step Action
1 Open the PLC Bus view.
2 Right-click on an empty slot and select New Device.
3 In the Part Number column, expand Communication to see the available
modules, including the BMX NOR 0200 H.
NOTE: In a Modicon M340 system the total number of communication modules, such as
BMX NOE 010 or BMX NOR 0200 H modules, cannot exceed two. The maximum Ethernet port
for M340 system is 3 including the port on PLC. Therefore, a maximum of two BMX NOR 0200 H
modules can be inserted in a M340 system.
NOTE: For Modicon M580 system module limitations, refer to System Throughput Considerations
topic in Modicon M580 Standalone System Planning Guide for Frequently Used Architectures
(see page 11).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 175

New Device
The module is referenced as a BMX NOR 0200 in Unity Pro. It is available under Communication
in the New Device menu:
Only Ethernet port (channel 0) is configurable in Unity Pro. Serial port is configured through the
Web.
176 EIO0000000505 01/2016

The Unity Pro description for this module is Ethernet TCP/IP, RTU module:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 177

Configuration Screen
Module Configuration Screen

Use this screen to declare the communication channel (0) and to configure the necessary
parameters for the Ethernet port on the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
The configuration screen is divided into several zones:

Model Family: Select the model family for configuration.
Module Address: When the selected network is associated with a module, the rack, module,
and channel appears in this zone.
Module Utilities: Select the utilities used by the module.
Module IP Address: This field displays the module IP address.
service tabs: To configure a particular service, select the appropriate tab.
Security tab (see Modicon Controllers Platform, Cyber Security, Reference Manual):
Configure a system that is less susceptible to cyber attacks. This feature is available with
firmware V1.7 or later.
IP Configuration tab (see page 49): Declare the communication channel and configure the
necessary parameters for an Ethernet port
Messaging tab: (see page 55) Access on the Connection configuration area and the access
control area
178 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Project Settings
Check the Data dictionary option when you program the PLC application. Otherwise unlocated
variables may not be mapped to RTU data points. (Find this check box at: Tools Project
Settings General PLC embedded data.) However, a compiled application consumes more
memory when the Data dictionary is included. Be aware of this memory constraint when applying
unlocated variables in RTU solutions:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 179

Section 12.2
Debugging with Unity Pro
Debugging with Unity Pro
Overview
This section describes procedures for debugging the configuration of the BMX NOR 0200 H
modules with Unity Pro.

Topic Page
Module Debugging Screen 181
General Debugging Parameters 183
Debugging Parameters for TCP/IP Utilities 186
180 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Module Debugging Screen
Screen
This four-zone Unity Pro Debug tab provides options to debug an Ethernet port.
NOR screen:
Ethernet 1 Port 10/100 RJ45 Version: 1.0 1
Run Err. STS
Config Debug Fault

BMX NOR 0100 4
Channel 0 Address information NTP
2 From a MAC Address 00.00.54.00.1D.B7 NTP status Link to the NTP Server Primary
server
IP Address 192 . 168 . 1 . 100 DST status Daylight Saving Time NTP server IP address 192.168.16.10
Subnetwork mask 255 . 255 . 0 . 0 Time zone (GMT-05:00)Eastern Standard Time[New York]
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 Requests 12 Responses 11 Errors 16#1 Last error 16#0
Messages
Open connections 0 Reset counters
Non-authorized 0
Messages refused 0 Ping
Messages received 0 IO Scanning
Bandwidth Not configured 16 1
Messages sent 0 Scanned
IO Scanning Unscanned 32 17
48 33
enabled Faulty or absent 64 49
Message traffic (msg./min)
3 2000 msg/sec
Function: Global data
ETH TCP IP Not configured 16 1
Task: SUB variable 32 17
MAST Global Data Default SUB 48 33
enabled PUB variable 64 49
Network link: Min. 0 Avg. 0 Max. 0 Reset
nor
EIO0000000505 01/2016 181

This table describes the zones in the configuration screen:
Zone Function
1: Module module description zone Run on: module is operating
(For details refer to LED off: PLC not configured
Indicators (see page 24).) Err. on: configuration or system error
has been detected
off: operation is normal
STS on: communication is OK

flashing: communication error
detected
2: Channel channel selection zone
3: Parameters general parameters zone
4: Debug tab Address information displays TCP/IP utility configuration
tests communication of the TCP/IP profile
Messages displays the number of open connections and

the number of messages that are unauthorized,
refused, received, and sent.
Message traffic displays the number of messages processed by
the module per minute
NTP displays the status of the NTP server
182 EIO0000000505 01/2016

General Debugging Parameters
Introduction
The general debugging parameters on the module debugging screen (see page 181) are grouped
into two windows:
the Message traffic window
the Messages window
Message Traffic
The Message traffic window looks like this:
It graphically shows the number of Ethernet packets per second handled by the module (sent and
received).
The Reset button resets the Min., Av., and Max counters to 0.
Messages
The Messages window looks like this:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 183

This window reports the number of:

open TCP/IP connections (the combined number of server, client, and Transparent Device
Access connections that are open)
non-authorized TCP/IP connections
refused TCP/IP messages
received TCP/IP messages
sent TCP/IP messages
This window includes three buttons:

Reset counters: Press this button to reset the counters to 0.
Ping (see below)
Bandwidth (see below)
Ping
You can test the routing between your module and another device through a PING request:
Step Action Comment

1 Enter the IP address of the device for which you want to test communications and
press Ping.
2 Wait for the request to be processed This window appears:
184 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Step Action Comment

3 The COMMUNICATION window The COMMUNICATION window:
informs you that the exchange was
successful.
4 Press OK. With the successful PING request, a value

appears in the ms field.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 185

Debugging Parameters for TCP/IP Utilities
Address Information
The debugging parameters for TCP/IP utilities on the module debugging screen
(see Modicon M340 for Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors, User Manual) are
grouped together in the Address information window:
This window displays the configuration of:

MAC Address
IP Address
Subnetwork mask
Gateway Address
186 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Configuration with the Setup Web Pages
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 13
Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the following module parameters:
serial port and Ethernet port parameters configuration
modem parameters configuration
IEC 61508-5-101/104/ DNP3 protocols parameters configuration

Section Topic Page
13.1 Web Site Configuration Common 188
13.2 Web Site Configuration IEC 214
13.3 Web Site Configuration DNP3 269
EIO0000000505 01/2016 187

Section 13.1
Web Site Configuration Common
Web Site Configuration Common

Topic Page
Parameter Input Interface in Setup Web Pages 189
Channel Configuration 192
Serial Port Configuration 197
Ethernet Port Configuration 204
Time Zone Configuration 205
RTU Protocol Parameters 207
Module and Protocols Configuration File 208
RTU Protocol Service Reset 211
Backward Compatibility 212
188 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Parameter Input Interface in Setup Web Pages
Setup Page
Parameters Input Overview

Each parameter input field contains these basic parts:
Parameter Title: The Parameter Title contains the name of the parameter. It includes the value
unit within brackets (if applicable).
Input Field: Enter the desired parameter value in this field.
Parameter Description: Provides a brief description of the parameter. It includes the data type
of the parameter, valid scope setting, and default value.
NOTE: A reset parameter (or reboot of the module) is necessary to take into account any
configuration changes (see page 211).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 189

By default the parameter description is hidden. The description appears only when you place the
cursor over the input field:
Configuration Files Compatibility

The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports upward compatibility with previous version.
Consistency Checking
Support consistency checking in web configuration including uniqueness checking of CPU register
address, relationship checking of relative parameters. The consistency checking is processed
before user decide to change effective by click Change or Add button:
If the value of the parameters does not abide by consistency checking, a parameter conflict
dialog is popped up. It is only to show user the problem. Choose Cancel to cancel this
configuration, and choose OK to go on this operation.
The invalid parameter dialog is popped up to reject the configuration of the user.
Parameter conflict page for consistency checking:
190 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Detected invalid input page for consistency checking:
Gray Out Option Automatically

For the parameters conflicting with other parameters, they are disabled automatically once the
relative parameter is enabled.
Screen of gray option:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 191

Channel Configuration
Communication Setup
Before configuring the ports of the BMX NOR 0200 H module, select the link to be configured via
the website.
Click Communication Channel Parameters Add :
192 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Parameter Value scope Default value Description

Channel ID 0...4 0 index of the channel
Protocol IEC/DNP3 IEC(101,104) protocol type
Network Type TCP-IP/Raw Serial and for TCP-IP physical port type
DNP3, TCP-UDP, and
UDP-IP
Mode Master/Slave Slave(Server) role in network
IP Address 255.255.255.255 IP address of remote device (multiple
address separate by semicolon).
Local Port 0...65535 2404 port of remote device
Connection 1...4 1 For IEC104 and DNP3 server: maximum
Count number of clients connected to the
server at one time.
Protocol: 1 For IEC104 and DNP3 client: maximum
IEC(101,104): 1...64 number of servers connected to the
DNP3: 1...32 client at one time.
Status Reg Type %MW %MW channel status register type in CPU
Status Reg Start 0...32464 0 Start address of channel connection
Address status register (32 bits) in CPU, for
server that configured with more than
one client, there is an independent
status register for each client.
NOTE: When a module is in the slave/server mode, several clients ( 4) can be connected to the
module. These clients have the same configuration except for the IP address. Configure the client
number in the parameter Connection Count. At this time, four channels are displayed on the
page. But only one is real, the others are displayed as virtual. When the user adds/removes a real
channel, the operation affects all virtual channels.
NOTE: The choice between IEC 101 and IEC 104 depends on the combination of protocol, mode,
and network in the communication settings.
NOTE: Master/slave is used in serial communication, but client/server is used in Ethernet
communication.
The designations of the protocols are:
IEC 60870-5-101 master/IEC 60870-5-101 slave
IEC 60870-5-104 client/IEC 60870-5-104 server
DNP3 master/DNP3 slave
DNP3 Net client/DNP3 Net server
EIO0000000505 01/2016 193

Multiple Protocols
The configuration supports multiple protocols in one module. IEC 101 master/IEC 104 server,
IEC 104 client/IEC 104 server, DNP3 master/DNP3 Net server, DNP3 Net client/DNP3 Net server,
only this combinations table is allowed. Do not run IEC and DNP3 at the same time within one
module.
Case 1 2
Protocol Max count Protocol Max count
1 DNP3 master 1
2 DNP3 NET master 1
3 IEC 101 master 1
4 IEC 104 master 1
5 DNP3 slave 1
6 DNP3 NET server 1
7 IEC 101 slave 1
8 IEC 104 server 1
9 DNP3 master 1 DNP3 NET server 1
10 DNP3 NET client 1 DNP3 NET server 1
11 IEC 101 master 1 IEC 104 server 1
12 IEC 104 client 1 IEC 104 server 1
Multi-server for IEC 104 client and DNP3 IP client

Only one client channel is allowed to configure in communication setting, but it can support up to
64 servers in 64 sessions (IEC 104) and 32 servers in 32 sessions (DNP3). Each session
corresponds to one server. All sessions share the configuration of the common channel parameter.
The feature is supported by both of IEC 104 client and DNP3 NET client.
194 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the communication configuration:
IP Address and port are set in session panel instead of communication setting. When Connection
Count is more than 1, the corresponding status register is following Status Reg Start Address,
each status occupies two words.
This figure shows the IP address and port configuration:
Only one IP is allowable in this panel.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 195

This figure shows the session count:
The session count may be up to 32 with same IP address for only one channel. For more than one
connection, the session counter is same as the number of connections.
This figure shows the share channel parameters:
All connections (clients) to different servers share the common channel parameters listed above.
196 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Serial Port Configuration
Introduction
To configure the module in serial mode, select Setup Serial Port Parameters.
NOTE: To configure a modem in serial link (serial mode or PPP), it is mandatory to configure the
serial port.
Serial Configuration

Physical Line RS232/RS485 RS232 selects physical
connection lines
Signals Rx-Tx selects signal lines for
Rx-Tx communication
Rx-Tx+RTS-CTS
Rx-Tx+RTS-CTS-DCE
Delay Before 0...65535 (as the unit is 10 ms, 0 only used with DCE flow
Transmission (T1) the range is 0...655.35 s) control algorithm;
transmission delay after
RTS is set
Delay After 0...65535 (as the unit is 10 ms, 0 only used with DCE flow
Transmission (T2) the range is 0...655.35 s) control algorithm; time to
reset RTS after
transmission end
EIO0000000505 01/2016 197


Delay Between 0...65535 (as the unit is 10 ms, 0 only used with DCE flow
Transmissions (T3) the range is 0...655.35 s) control algorithm; min.
time between RTS reset
and next RTS set
(the delay depends on the
application)
Baud Rate 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/ 19200 transmission speed of the
19200/38400 serial port, bits per
second
Data Bits 8 8 bits for data in one
transmission unit
Stop Bits 1/2 1 bits to stop in one
transmission unit
Parity None/Odd/Even None parity mode
This chronogram shows the settable delays:
Modem Configuration
Select Communication Modem Parameters:
198 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Parameter Value scope Default Description

value
Modem Type None / Radio / None selects Modem type
PSTN / GSM /
GPRS
Connection Type Permanent/ On Permanent: connect modem automatically when module is
On Demand Demand power up
On Demand: connect or disconnect modem according to
CMD Reg in CPU
Default Phone 1...64 1 phone index in phone list: used when connection mode is
Index permanent, or value in CPU phone index register is invalid
Max Retry 0...255 3 indicates the maximum number of retries to establish a
connection.
Command Reg 0...32464 0 start %MW address of 4 CPU modem registers which represent
Address (%MW) modem command and status for modem serial link. Or start
address of 8 %MW registers, which represent modem command,
status, local and remote IP address for modem PPP link.
PPP Enable check box checked if enabled, PPP protocol is used for the modem connection
NOTE: When using RTU protocol (IEC 104/DNP3) via PSTN/GPRS or ADSL mode, the gateway
IP address is replaced after connection is established. So it is not possible to route through
Ethernet when the module is connected to the GPRS/PPPoE network.
GSM
Condition: GSM has been selected in the Modem screen.
Select Communication Modem Modem GSM:

Init AT CMD ATE0Q0S0=1&D0&S0&C0 custom AT commands specified by user - AT commands
to initialize modem, which is an AT command string
starting with AT
EIO0000000505 01/2016 199


PIN Code 4-8 number 0000 PIN code for the SIM card
SMS - number of the service center for the SMS server -
Service International format number of the service center for the
Center SMS server, set symbol (-) if not specify it
SMS Type PDU_7bits/ PDU_7bits PDU_7bits: the message is encoded on 7 bits, and it is
PDU_8bits used to send text message composed of ASCII
characters. It is supported in most of mobile phones.
PDU_8bits: the message is encoded as 8 bits, and it is
used to send data message. It depends on the brand of
mobile phone, not all mobile phones support it.
GPRS
Condition: GPRS has been selected in the Modem screen.
Select Communication Modem Modem GPRS:

Init AT ATE0Q0S0=1&D0&S0&C0 custom AT commands specified by user - AT commands
Command to initialize modem, which is an AT command string
starting with AT
Access Point - name of the access point given by the service provider for
Name (APN) GPRS
PIN Code 4 digits at 0000 PIN code for the SIM card
least
SMS Service - number of the service center for the SMS server -
Center International format number of the service center for the
SMS server, set symbol (-) if not specify it
200 EIO0000000505 01/2016


SMS Type PDU_7bits/ PDU_7bits PDU_7bits: the message is encoded on 7 bits, and it is
PDU_8bits used to send text message composed of ASCII
characters. It is supported in most of mobile phones.
PDU_8bits: the message is encoded as 8 bits, and it is
used to send data message. It depends on the brand of
mobile phone, not all mobile phones support it.
Username USER username of the APN given by the service provider
Password USER password of the APN given by the service provider, set
symbol (-) if not specifying it
Local IP 0.0.0.0 Local IP address for PPP client, and IP address is served
address by server if specifying 0.0.0.0.
PSTN
Condition: PSTN has been selected in the Modem screen.
Select Communication Modem Modem PSTN:

Init AT CMD ATE0Q0S0=1&D0&S0&C0 custom AT commands specified by user - AT commands
to initialize modem, which is an AT command string
starting with AT
EIO0000000505 01/2016 201

PPP Server
Conditions: in the Modem screen, the modem type GSM or PSTN has been selected and the box
PPP Enable has been checked.
Select Communication Modem PPP Server:

Username for Server USER username of the remote device (only used for
modem PPP as server mode)
Password for Server USERUSER password of the remote device (only used for
modem PPP as server mode)
Local IP Address 0.0.0.0 IP address of the remote device
Allow Remote IP Address check box unchecked whether allow calling device to specify its own
IP address
202 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Phone List
Select Communication Modem Phone List:

Phone Index 1...64 1 phone number index of the remote device
Phone Number 000000 phone number of the remote device
Local IP 0.0.0.0 IP address of the local device and IP address is served by
provider if specifying 0.0.0.0. (only used for modem PPP as
server mode)
Username USER username of the remote device (only used for modem PPP as
server mode)
Password USERUSER password of the remote device (only used for modem PPP as
server mode)
Comment Comment comments from the user
EIO0000000505 01/2016 203

Ethernet Port Configuration
PPPoE Setup
The Ethernet port is configured via Unity Pro. Nevertheless, in case of an ADSL modem the PPPoE
protocol is used and the Ethernet port is configured via the Web site.
Click PPPoE setup:

Enable PPPoE check box unchecked enable PPPoE on modem connection
Connection Type Permanent/On Demand Permanent Permanent: connect modem
automatically when module is
power up
On Demand: connect or disconnect
modem according to CMD Reg in
CPU
CPU Reg 0...32264 0 start address of 8 %MW registers, which
Address represent modem command, status,
local and remote IP address
Username for USER username to connect with this
Server PPP server
Password for USERUSER password to connect with this
Server PPP server
Local IP address 0.0.0.0 specify PPPoE client IP address,
and IP address is served by provider if
specifying 0.0.0.0
204 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Time Zone Configuration
Web Site Configuration

The time zone is configurable only for the DNP3 master and slave, which have the same options
as NTP configurations in Unity Pro. The purpose is to set time zone when the BMX NOR 0200 H
module has not specified a time zone in the NTP configuration or the NTP is disabled.

Time Zone Custom timezone (GMT0) The default format is Universal Time
(GMT-12:00)Dateline Greenwich Coordinated (UTC). Optionally it can
Standard Time Mean Time be configured to use a local time
(GMT0)Greenwich Mean Time zone. If it mismatches with the time
zone configuration in Unity Pro,
keep as the Unity Pro setting.
Automatically check box unchecked the module automatically adjust the
clock for time change in the spring and fall
daylight saving
change:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 205

Unity Pro Configuration

If NTP configuration is enabled in Unity Pro as shown in the figure, the parameter in the Web page
has the same configuration as NTP when the DNP3 protocol is created.
This figure shows the time zone in Unity Pro:
NTP Configuration
If NTP configuration is different from time zone in the Web page, an indicator label displays
explicitly in the Web page.
NOTE: The NTP configuration has higher priority, which means that the BMX NOR 0200 H module
uses the time zone of NTP, not the setting configured in the Web page if they mismatch with each
other.
This figure shows the time zone in the Web site:
206 EIO0000000505 01/2016

RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
You can enter values for protocol parameters in the input fields on the Web page. Protocol
parameters are either basic or advanced:
Parameters: basic parameters can be modified in each user application.
Advanced Parameters: it is not recommended to change advanced parameters unless a
change is required by a specific application requirement.
These parameters allow you to set up RTU applications with the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 207

Module and Protocols Configuration File
Introduction
Using this utility, the user exports or imports configuration parameters and data mapping files.
You can save the module and protocols configuration parameters in an *.XML file to a local storage
media or upload a previously saved configuration file.
You can export RTU data object mapping to an *.XSY symbol file that can be imported into your
application program in Unity Pro.
Import/Export File
This figure shows the export data mapping:
It provides an interface to edit/remove the collision parameter. User can edit the parameter by
double clicking or remove it directly by clicking remove button.
208 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the import data mapping:
NOTE: It checks the consistency of protocols when importing data mapping.

Only these combinations are allowed:
DNP3 Net client/ server <-> DNP3 Net client/ server
DNP3 master/ slave <-> DNP3 master/ slave
DNP3 Net client/ server <-> DNP3 master/ slave
IEC 101 master/ slave <-> IEC 101 master/ slave
IEC 104 client/ server <-> IEC 104 client/ server
IEC 101 master/ slave <-> IEC 104 client/ server
Exporting Locally
Follow these steps to export the configuration profile to a local place:
Step Action Comment
1 Right-click the hyperlink (Right click here...).
2 Scroll to Save Target As. The dialog box appears.
3 Select the local location to which the profile is stored.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 209

Importing to the Module

Follow these steps to import a saved configuration profile to the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
Step Action Comment

1 Click Browse. This helps you select and save the configuration profile
in an open dialog box.
2 Click Import. The uploads the file and imports it.
NOTE: The newly imported configuration profile is not implemented until you reset the RTU
services on the module.
Export of Data Mapping File for Unity Pro

You can export RTU data object mapping to unlocated variables to an *.XSY symbol file that can
be imported into your application program in Unity Pro.
210 EIO0000000505 01/2016

RTU Protocol Service Reset
Setup Tree
After any protocol parameters change (either by entering a new value or by importing a new
parameter file), reset the RTU function in order to implement the changes. This figure shows the
setup tree for an IEC 60870-5-104 server as an example:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 211

Backward Compatibility
Introduction
The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports upward compatibility from V1.0 to V1.5. RTU V1.5 has
upwards compatibility including firmware and configuration files. All features from previous
versions are supported by V1.7.
Event Backup Compatibility

Firmware and hardware supporting event backup:
Product Version Firmware Version

PV03, PV07 or later V1.5 or later
NOTE: If you are using PV03 hardware, the user interface allows you to set event backup
parameters, but they are not applied if a loss of power occurs. A message appears on the
configuration page indicating that the event backup feature is not supported by PV01, PV02, PV05,
and PV06. Check your hardware version if you need this feature.
Screen of event backup:
Firmware and Hardware Compatibility
NOTICE
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT BEHAVIOR
Do not load firmware V1.0 or V1.5 in a BMX NOR 0200 H with PV09 or later.
212 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Firmware and hardware compatibility table:
Product Version Firmware Version

PV01...PV08 V1.0 or V1.5
All V1.6 or later
Website Configuration Files Compatibility

New website configuration files are not supported in old firmware.
Old website configuration files can be imported into new firmware, all parameters are effective.
All new parameters are assigned as default values and configurable after importing the old
configuration files.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 213

Section 13.2
Web Site Configuration IEC
Web Site Configuration IEC

Topic Page
IEC 60870-5-101 Master RTU Protocol Parameters 215
IEC 60870-5-101 Slave RTU Protocol Parameters 223
IEC 60870-5-104 Client RTU Protocol Parameters 234
IEC 60870-5-104 Server RTU Protocol Parameters 239
IEC Data Object Mapping Page and Table 247
IEC Data Object Mapping 258
IEC Event Queue Setting 260
IEC 60870-5-101/104 Master/Client 262
IEC Data Length & Mapping Orientation 265
IEC Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT 266
214 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC 60870-5-101 Master RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Select IEC101-104 as Protocol, Master as Mode, and Raw Serial as Network Type.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-101 Master Parameters:

value
DL Address Length 0/1/2 1 indicates the octets used for data link
address
Use Balanced Mode check box unchecked indicates the usage of balanced or
unbalanced mode
Session Count 1...32 1 indicates the maximum number of
sessions on the channel
EIO0000000505 01/2016 215

Configure the modules advanced parameters:

value
First Char Wait (ms) 0...65535 0 indicates the minimum time between
reception and transmission
Rx Buffer Size 0...256 256 indicates the receive buffer size of
serial port (bytes)
One Char Ack Allowed check box unchecked allows transmission of one character
E5 instead of the fixed-length ACK
message
One Char Nack Allowed check box unchecked allows transmission of one-character
response instead of the fixed-length
NACK message, when no response
data is available
216 EIO0000000505 01/2016


value
Rx Frame Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 15000 indicates the maximum waiting time
for a complete frame after receiving
frame sync.
Confirm Mode NEVER NEVER specifies when to request the link
SOMETIMES layer confirmation for variable sized
ALWAYS frames that contain user data, which
is not transmitted to the broadcast
address
Confirm Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 2000 indicates the maximum waiting time
for link level confirmation, if requested
Max Retries 0...255 2 indicates the retry count of the link
layer confirmation timeouts
Test Frame Period (ms) 0...4294967295 0 specifies the period for transmitting
the verification message, to prove that
the remote device is still online in the
balance mode
Offline Poll Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period to re-establish
transfer of an offline session
Incremental Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 30000 indicates the incremental application
layer timeout
Max Queue Size 0...65535 0 indicates the maximum request
message number with a specific
Application Specific Data Unit type
and destination matching an
outstanding request that will be
queued on a master.
0: disabled queue
65535: unlimited queue
EIO0000000505 01/2016 217

Session Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-101 Master Session Parameters:

value
Sector Count 1...5 1 indicates the sectors for this session
Data Link Address 0...65535 3 specifies octets for data link address
CAA Size 1...2 2 specifies octets for common address of
Application Specific Data Unit
IOA Size 1...3 2 specifies octets of IOA
COT Size 1...2 1 specifies octets of COT
218 EIO0000000505 01/2016


value
Originator address for COT 0...255 1 specifies the originator address for
COT if COT length = 2
Default Response Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 60000 indicates the default timeout for
the confirmation of request
C1/C2 Pending Count 0...65535 10 indicates Class 1 and 2 polls when
an application layer response is
pending before next slave tried
Class 1 Polls Count 0...65535 10 indicates the maximum Class 1
polls to this session before next
slave tried
Class 1 Pending Delay (ms) 0...65535 0 For an unbalanced master, the
minimum delay before a Class
request will be sent if an
application layer response is
pending for this session. These
parameters may be used to limit
the bandwidth used.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 219


value
Class 1 Poll Delay (ms) 0...4294967295 0 For an unbalanced master, the
request will be sent. These
the bandwidth used.
Class 2 Pending Delay (ms) 0...4294967295 500 For an unbalanced master, the
request will be sent if an
application layer response is
pending for this session. These
the bandwidth used.
Class 2 Poll Delay (ms) 0...4294967295 500 For an unbalanced master, the
request will be sent. These
the bandwidth used.
Sector Parameters
Click Setup Channelx IEC-101 Master Sessionx Sectorx Parameters:

value
Common ASDU Address 1...65535 3 indicates the common address of
ASDU, 65535 is broadcast address.
220 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Configure the module with advanced parameters:

value
Clock Sync Mode ACQUISITE sync only indicates the clock synchronization
LOAD mode, this parameter only applies to
SYNC ONLY actions performed automatically.
ACQUISITE: Delay acquisition followed
by load delay followed by clock sync
LOAD: Load delay followed by clock
sync
SYNC ONLY: Clock sync only
Propagation Delay (ms) 0...65535 0 indicates the propagation delay if
Clock Sync Mode is set to LOAD
M_EI_NA GI check box checked specifies if general interrogation is
performed after reception of
M_EI_NA EOI message
M_EI_NA Time sync check box checked specifies if Clock Sync is performed after
reception of M_EI_NA EOI message
M_EI_NA CI check box unchecked specifies if counter interrogation is
performed after reception of
M_EI_NA EOI message
EIO0000000505 01/2016 221


value
Online GI check box checked specifies if general interrogation is
performed whenever determines that a
remote device has come online,
available for devices that do not
generate M_EI_NA EOImessage
Online Time Sync check box checked specifies if Clock Sync is performed
whenever determines that a remote
device has come online, available for
devices that do not generate
M_EI_NA EOI message
Online CI check box unchecked specifies if counter interrogation is
performed whenever determines that a
remote device has come online,
available for devices that do not
generate M_EI_NA EOI message
ACTTERM with CSE Setpoint check box unchecked specifies whether to expect ACTTERM
from slave upon completion of set point
commands CSENA, CSENB and CSENC
ACTTERM with Command check box unchecked specifies whether to expect ACTTERM
from slave upon completion of
commands other than set point
commands
222 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC 60870-5-101 Slave RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Select IEC101-104 as Protocol, Slave as Mode, and Raw Serial as Network Type.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-101 Slave Parameters:

value
DL Address Length 1...2 1 indicates the bytes used for data link address
Use Balanced Mode check box unchecked indicates the usage of balanced or
unbalanced mode
Event Backup Enable check box unchecked indicates whether to backup event on loss of
power
Event Time Quality Invalid, Original Original When restoring backup events after power
Quality Quality restoration, the time quality is forced to
invalid with Forcing Invalid
the original quality with Original Quality
NOTE: The box Event Backup Enable must

be checked beforehand
Session Count 1...32 1 indicates the maximum number of sessions
on the channel
EIO0000000505 01/2016 223


value
Rx Buffer Size 0...256 256 indicates the receive buffer size of
serial port (bytes)
One Char Ack Allowed check box unchecked allows transmission of one-character
E5 instead of the fixed-length ACK
message
One Char Nack Allowed check box unchecked allows transmission of one-character
response instead of the fixed-length
NACK message, when no response data
is available
224 EIO0000000505 01/2016


value
Rx Frame Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 15000 indicates the timeout of waiting for a
complete frame after the receiving frame
synchronization
Confirm Mode NEVER/ ALWAYS specifies when to request the link layer
SOMETIMES/ confirmation for variable sized frames
ALWAYS that contain user data, which is not
transmitted to the broadcast address
Confirm Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 2000 indicates the maximum waiting time for
link level confirmation, if requested
Max Retries 0...255 2 indicates the retry count of the link layer
confirmation time-outs
Test Frame Period (ms) 0...4294967295 0 specifies the period for transmitting the
verification message, to prove that the
remote device is still online in the balance
mode
Offline Poll Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period to re-establish
transfer of an offline session
layer time-out
Session Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-101 Slave Session Parameters:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 225


value
Data Link Address 0...65535 3 indicates bytes for the data link address
CAA Size 1...2 2 specifies bytes for common address of
IOA Size 1...3 2 specifies bytes of IOA
COT Size 1...2 1 specifies bytes of COT
Sector Count 1...5 1 indicates sectors for this session

value
Max ASDU Size 0...252 252 indicates the maximum size of an
Max Poll Delay (ms) 0...4294967295 20000 indicates the maximum time between
link polls before the unbalanced slave is
declared offline
226 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Sector Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-101 Slave Session Sector Parameters:

value
Common ASDU Address 1...65535 3 indicates the common address of
ASDU, 65535 is broadcast address
Cyclic Message Interval (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the number of milliseconds
between cyclic updates
Background Period (ms) 0...4294967295 20000 specifies the period to generate
background scan data on this sector
Default Response Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 60000 indicates the default timeout for the
confirmation of request
Send Clock Sync Events check box unchecked controls if spontaneous clock
synchronization events are
transmitted to the master. The time
format is CP24
Read Time Format None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the completeness time
format for respond to C_RD_NA
C_RD_NA Measurands Time Format None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the time format for respond
to C_RD_NA
C_IC_NA Time Format None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the time stamp format in
response of C_IC_NA
EIO0000000505 01/2016 227


Select 0...4294967295 5000 specifies the period after which a previously
Timeout (ms) received selection is timed-out. An execute
command must be received before the time-out
in order to be valid.
ACTTERM with check box checked specifies if ACT TERM is transmitted upon
CSE Setpoint completion of the set point commands:
C_SE_NA, C_SE_NB, C_SE_NC, C_SE_TA,
C_SE_TB, C_SE_TC
ACTTERM with check box checked specifies if ACT TERM is transmitted upon
Command completion of commands, other than the set point
commands.
228 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Clock Valid 0...4294967295 86400000 specifies the period for which the system clock
Period (ms) remains valid after a clock synchronization. If this
period expires without a clock synchronization, all
times are reported invalid.
Delete Oldest check box unchecked specifies if the oldest event is removed from the
Event event queue when buffer is full and a new event
comes.
Checked: Remove the oldest event.
Unchecked: Ignore the new event.
Short Pulse 0...4294967295 100 specifies the width of the pulse in milliseconds
Duration
Long Pulse 0...4294967295 1000 specifies the width of the pulse in milliseconds
Duration
Counter Mode Freeze On Demand Freeze On Demand specifies the mode of freezing counter
Local Freeze Only To support Mode A or Mode B, select either
Local Freeze and Local Freeze Only or Local Freeze and Reset.
Reset To support Mode C or Mode D, select
Freeze On Demand.
Auto Local Auto Enabled Auto Enabled specifies the local freeze start and stop
Freeze (1) Control by App conditions
Behavior:
Auto Enabled: Local freeze starts automatically
after BMX NOR 0200 H startup or restart.
Control by App: Local freeze is configured by
CPU application. Use CUSTOM_CMD
(see page 231) data structure.
Freeze 0...4294967295 2000 specifies the period (in milliseconds) at which to
Period(Grp-G) (1) freeze the counter automatically on all the
groups. It only takes effect on local freeze.
Value 0 disables freezing.
Period(Grp-1) (1) freeze the counter automatically on group 1.
It only takes effect on local freeze.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 229


Summer Bit check box unchecked specifies whether to manage the summer bit of
time stamp which comes from an external device
or CPU. Effective only when Daylight Saving
Time is enabled
CMD Queue Size 1...128 1 specifies the size of the command queue to
process in parallel for each point type
C_DC Impulse Indeterminate State Determinate State specifies whether the final state is in valid state or
Determinate State Indeterminate state.
Behavior:
Determinate State: only ON and OFF are valid
states, the final state is ON or OFF after
impulse.
Indeterminate State: the final state is 0 after
executing any impulse.
Data Synch Mode Cyclic Synch Cyclic Synch specifies how the data are synchronized: either
Synch On Demand cyclically or when the slave station receives a
request from the master (see note); it is used only
by data of type C_SE_NA, C_SE_NB, C_SE_NC
and C_BO_NA
PLC State (1) No Impact Quality No Impact Quality for non-routing points, specifies if the PLC state
Impact Quality modifies or not the quality bit when quality is
required by the master.
Behavior:
No Impact Quality: PLC state has no effect on
the quality bit.
Impact Quality: PLC state has an effect on the
quality bit.
A PLC in STOP state or a PLC missing
generates an invalid quality bit.
A PLC in RUN state generates a valid
quality bit.
NOTE: Only %MW and %M control points are supported in the Synch On Demand mode.
230 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Counter Mode for Local Freeze and Freeze On Demand

Configuration for Counter Mode:
Counter Mode M_IT Events Configured M_IT Events Not Configured

Local Freeze Mode A Mode B
Freeze On Demand Mode D Mode C
NOTE: In mode Local Freeze and Reset, the counter is automatically frozen at the value 0.
NOTE: If counter events buffer is configured, Mode A is set by default. A mixed counter event mode
is not supported. Only one counter event mode is supported at a time.
The Freeze Period(Grp-x) parameter can be configured in milliseconds to freeze
automatically for Mode A or Mode B. The frozen counter is reported spontaneously with valid
events.
NOTE: The Counter event buffer must be configured for Mode A in case of an event loss. You can
enable to delete oldest events in order to prevent new events from being lost.
CUSTOM_CMD Data Structure

CUSTOM_CMD (DWORD):
Name Type Word Description

Command WORD 0 Start or stop local freezing.
Status WORD 1 Provides the freezing command status for each group.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 231

Command (WORD):
Name Type Bit Description

Command BOOL 0 Global group control.
Bit value:
0: Stop freezing.
1: Start freezing.
BOOL 1 Group 1 control.
Bit value:
0: Stop freezing.
1: Start freezing.
Bit value:
0: Stop freezing.
1: Start freezing.
Bit value:
0: Stop freezing.
1: Start freezing.
Bit value:
0: Stop freezing.
1: Start freezing.
5...15 Any value change triggers the command
(start or stop freezing)
232 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Status (WORD):
Name Type Bit Description

Status BOOL 0 Global group status.
Bit value:
0: Freezing is disabled.
1: Freezing is enabled.
BOOL 1 Group 1 status.
Bit value:
Bit value:
Bit value:
Bit value:
5...15 Freezing execution status.
Group of bits value:
0: Freezing command executed.
1: Freezing command not executed.
Daylight Saving Time and Summer Standard Time

The Daylight Saving Time (DST) is an optional feature which can be configured in the time
zone web page (disabled by default):
NOTE: The Summer Bit is not supported in CP24Time2a.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 233

IEC 60870-5-104 Client RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Select IEC101-104 as Protocol, Master as Mode, and TCP-IP as Network Type.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup IEC-104 Client Channel Parameters:

value
T1 Ack Period (ms) 0...4294967295 15000 specifies the waiting time for ACK to a
transmitted APDU
T2 S Frame Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the waiting time before
transmitting the supervisory APDU ACK
T3 Test Period (ms) 0...4294967295 20000 specifies the idle time before transmitting
the TEST APDU
K Value 1...12 12 indicates the maximum transmitted
APDUs that are not acknowledged
W Value 0...32767 8 indicates the maximum received APDUs
that are not acknowledged
Session Count 1...32 1 indicates the maximum number of
sessions on the channel
NOTE: Limitations: T2 S Frame Period < T1 Ack Period and W Value < 2/3 K Value.
234 EIO0000000505 01/2016


value
Rx Buffer Size 0...256 256 indicates the received buffer size of serial
port
Offline Poll Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period an offline attempts to
re-establish communication
layer time-out
Max Queue Size 0...65535 0 indicates the maximum request message
number with specific Application Specific
Data Unit type in the transmission queue
EIO0000000505 01/2016 235

Session Parameters
Click Setup IEC-104 Client Channel Session0 Parameters:

IP Address 255.255.255.255 192.168.0.1 indicates the IP address of remote device
Port 0...65535 2404 indicates the TCP port of remote device
Sector Count 1...5 1 indicates the sectors for this slave
COT Size 2 2 indicates octets of COT

value
Originator Address for COT 0...255 1 specifies the originator address for
COT, if the COT length is equal to 2
Default Response Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 3000 indicates the default time-out for
confirmation of request
236 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Sector Parameters
Click Setup IEC-104 Client Channel Session0 Sector0 Parameters:

value
Common ASDU Address 1...65535 3 indicates the common address of ASDU,
65535 is broadcast address.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 237

Parameter Value Default Description

scope value
M_EI_NA GI check box checked specifies if the general interrogation is performed after
receiving the M_EI_NA EOI message
M_EI_NA Time check box checked specifies if the clock synchronization is performed
sync after receiving the M_EI_NA EOI message
M_EI_NA CI check box unchecked specifies if the counter interrogation is performed after
receiving M_EI_NA EOI message
Online GI check box checked specifies if the general interrogation is performed
whenever the M_EI_NA EOI message is received
Online Time check box checked specifies if the clock synchronization is performed
Sync whenever the M_EI_NA EOI message is received
Online CI check box unchecked specifies if the counter interrogation is performed
whenever the M_EI_NA EOI message is received
ACTTERM with check box unchecked specifies if ACTTERM is expected from slave upon
CSE Setpoint completion of set point commands
ACTTERM with check box unchecked specifies if ACTTERM is expected from slave upon
Command completion of commands other than set point
commands
Command with check box unchecked specifies if the control command follows the time tag
Time Tag
238 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC 60870-5-104 Server RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Select IEC101-104 as Protocol, Slave as Mode, and TCT-IP as Network Type.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup Channel IEC-104 Server Parameters:

T1 Ack Period (ms) 0...4294967295 15000 specifies the waiting time for ACK to a
transmitted APDU
T2 S Frame Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the waiting time before sending
supervisory APDU ACK
T3 Test Period (ms) 0...4294967295 20000 specifies the idle time before sending
TEST APDU
K Value 1...12 12 indicates the maximum transmitted APDUs
that are not acknowledged
W Value 0...32767 8 indicates the maximum received APDUs that
are not acknowledged
Event Backup Enable check box unchecked indicates whether or not to backup event on
loss of power
EIO0000000505 01/2016 239


Event Restore Mode Main channel / Main Channel indicates on which channel to restore
All channels events to
Events Time Quality Original Quality/ Original Quality indicates which quality format the events will
Forcing Invalid restore to
NOTE: Limitations: T2 S Frame Period < T1 Ack Period and W Value < 2/3 K Value.
Parameter Value Scope Default Description

Value
Rx Buffer Size 0...256 256 indicates the received buffer size of serial
port
Offline Poll Period (ms) 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period of a session that is
offline attempts to re-establish
communication
Discard Frames on Disconnect check box unchecked Setting this TMWDEFS_TRUE on a slave will
cause received unacknowledged responses
(Information Frames) to be discarded when
the TCP connection is broken. If a slave has
sent responses, but has not yet received a
link layer ack, and the master is restarted
and reconnects, the old unacknowledged
responses will be resent.
Incremental Timeout (ms) 0...4294967295 30000 indicates the incremental application layer
time-out
240 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Session Parameters
Click Setup Channelx IEC-104 Server Sessionx Parameters:

Value
COT Size 2 2 indicates the bytes for COT
Sector Count 1...5 1 indicates sectors for this slave

Value
Max ASDU Size 0...249 249 indicates the maximum size of an
EIO0000000505 01/2016 241

Sector Parameters
Click Setup Channelx IEC-104 Server Sessionx Parameters:

Value
Common ASDU 1...65535 3 indicates the common address of
Address ASDU, 65535 is broadcast address.
Cyclic Message 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the number of milliseconds
Interval (ms) between cyclic updates
Background Period 0...4294967295 2000 specifies the period to generate
background scan data on this sector
Read Time Format None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the completeness time
format for responding to C_RD_NA
242 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Select 0...4294967295 50000 specifies the period after which a previously received
Timeout_(ms) selection is timed-out
Default 0...4294967295 6000 Responses that are no longer relevant are removed from
Response queue. For example, if the master is turned off before a
Timeout) response is acknowledged and then the master is restarted
later, this timeout value will be used to delete old responses.
ACTTERM with check box checked specifies if ACT TERM is transmitted upon completion of the
CSE Setpoint set point commands
EIO0000000505 01/2016 243


ACTTERM with check box checked specifies if the ACT TERM is sent upon completion of
Command commands other than the set point commands
Clock Valid 0...4294967295 86400000 specifies the period for which the system clock remains valid
Period (ms) after a clock synchronization. If this period expires without a
clock synchronization all times will be reported invalid.
Send Clock check box unchecked controls if the spontaneous clock synchronization events
Sync Events are sent to the master.
Max Command 0...600000 30000 indicates the maximum time delta at which commands are
Age (ms) accepted. The command time tag is checked and if the
elapsed time is greater than Max Command Age(ms), the
command gets no response.
Value 0 indicates that the command time tag is not checked.
Delete check box unchecked specifies if the oldest event is removed from the event
Oldest Event queue when buffer is full and a new event comes.
C_RD_NA None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the time format for responding to C_RD_NA
Measurands
Time Format
C_IC_NA Time None/ CP24/ CP56 None specifies the time stamp format in response of C_IC_NA
Format
Short Pulse 0...4294967295 100 specifies the width of the pulse in milliseconds
Duration
Long Pulse 0...4294967295 1000 specifies the width of the pulse in milliseconds
Duration
Counter Mode Freeze On Demand Freeze On specifies the mode of freezing counter
Local Freeze Only Demand To support Mode A or Mode B, select either
Local Freeze and Local Freeze Only or Local Freeze and Reset.
Reset To support Mode C or Mode D, select Freeze On Demand.
Auto Local Auto Enabled Auto Enabled specifies the local freeze start and stop conditions
Freeze (1) Control by App Behavior:
Auto Enabled: Local freeze starts automatically after
BMX NOR 0200 H startup or restart.
Control by App: Local freeze is configured by CPU
application. Use CUSTOM_CMD (see page 231) data
structure.
Freeze 0...4294967295 2000 specifies the period (in milliseconds) at which to freeze the
Period counter automatically on all groups. It only takes effect on
(Grp-G) (1) local freeze.
244 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Period counter automatically on group 1. It only takes effect on
(Grp-1) (1) local freeze.
Summer Bit check box unchecked specifies whether the summer bit of time stamp which
comes from external device or CPU is managed. Effective
only if Daylight Saving Time is enabled
CMD Queue 1...128 1 specifies the size of a command queue to process in parallel
Size for each point type
C_DC Impulse Indeterminate State Determinate specifies whether the final state is in valid state or
Determinate State State Indeterminate state.
Behavior:
Determinate State: only ON and OFF are valid states, the
final state is ON or OFF after impulse.
Indeterminate State: the final state is 0 after executing any
impulse.
Data Synch Cyclic Synch Cyclic Synch specifies how the data are synchronized: either cyclically or
Mode Synch On Demand when the server station receives a request from the master
(see note); it is used only by data of type C_SE_NA,
C_SE_NB, C_SE_NC and C_BO_NA
EIO0000000505 01/2016 245


Routing Valid Quality Valid Quality specifies if routing point quality depends on connection
Offline (1) Invalid Quality state with sub-slave or sub-server.
Behavior:
Valid Quality: Routing points quality does not change
when connection is lost.
Invalid Quality: Routing points quality is marked as invalid
when connection is lost.
PLC State (1) No Impact Quality No Impact for non-routing points, specifies if the PLC state modifies or
Impact Quality Quality not the quality bit when quality is required by the master.
Behavior:
No Impact Quality: PLC state has no effect on the quality
bit.
Impact Quality: PLC state has an effect on the quality bit.
A PLC in STOP state or a PLC missing generates an
invalid quality bit.
A PLC in RUN state generates a valid quality bit.
NOTE: Only %MW and %M control points are supported in the Synch On Demand mode.
246 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC Data Object Mapping Page and Table
Data Object Mapping Page

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the data object mapping for an item with the
example data type M_SP for IEC 60870-5-101/104 slave/server:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 247

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the M_SP data object mapping for IEC 101/104
server/slave:
248 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the M_SP data object mapping for IEC 101/104
client/master:
Mapping Table
Depending on the data object type and the selected protocol profile, different configuration fields
are required to define a data object mapping item. This table describes the parameters:
Title Value scope Default Description

value
IOA 1...16777215 1 indicates the Information Object Address of the object.
Point Count 1...5000 1 indicates the number of objects defined. The IOA of
each object is in sequence from the first object address.
CPU Register Type %M/%MW/ %MW indicates the register type in CPU to map points.
Unlocated
CPU Register 0...30000 0 indicates start address of the register in CPU.
Address field only taken into account for located variables.
Variable Name indicates the variable name of located or unlocated
register
EIO0000000505 01/2016 249

Title Value scope Default Description

value
Store To CPU Value only Value only indicates the choice if the store time follows the value in
Value with time the CPU registers.
Value with quality
Value with quality
and time
CPU Reg Mapping Value only Value only choice the event time stamp source.
Value with time module: use the module time as time stamp of event.
Value with flag CPU regs: use the time stamp in CPU registers.
Value with flag
and time
Event routing
Channel None/0/1 None indicates the channel number to route.
Session 0 0 indicates the session number to route.
Sector 0/1/2/3/4 0 indicates the sector number to route.
IOA 1...16777215 1 indicates the Information Object Address to route.
Background scan check box unchecked indicates that the background scan is enabled.
Cyclic data check box unchecked indicates that the cyclic data transmission is enabled.
transmission
Event generation (1) check box checked indicates that events for points can be configured.
Groups
Global/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/ check box Global defines data objects group responding for interrogation
10/11/12/13/14/15/16/C/B command from master/client. It can be combination of
options.
%S and %SW
The configuration supports %S only for single point input, M_SP, and %SW only for analog input,
M_ME_NA, for IEC slave.
NOTE: For %S and %SW, the CPU mapping does not support array due to the limits of the Unity
Pro.
250 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Quality Bit/Flag Mapping

The website configuration supports quality bit/flag mapping to CPU register for monitor data-points
for IEC master/slave.
NOTE: Use this feature in For M_SP, M_DP, M_ST,M_ME, M_ME_B, M_ME_C, and M_BO, M_IT.
The configuration reuses Timestamp Source in slave and Store To CPU in master, and expands
two choices based on RTU V1.0. Master and slave have similar configuration pages for quality bits
and flags.
NOTE:
For master, keep the parameter name Store To CPU.
For slave, change the name from Timestamp Source into CPU Reg. Mapping.
Behavior
Only monitor point type support this configuration on website except M_IT (server/slave).
If end user configures flag/quality bit in CPU register in slave, module does not manage the
quality bits/flags internally any more. BMX NOR 0200 H module generates event following
quality bit/flag in CPU register, otherwise, BMX NOR 0200 H generates them automatically.
In server/slave, the change of quality bits or flags in CPU can trigger to generate events just like
value change.
The length of quality bits or flag is 1 byte no matter how many bytes it is mapped in CPU register,
the least byte is valid. Refer to memory allocation.
Quality bit definition:
Point Flag Options Comments

definition
M_SP(SIQ) single point bit 0:0/off/1/on not used
information
reserved bit 1:0 not used
bit 2:0
bit 3:0
blocked bit 4:0 (not blocked) /1 (blocked)
substituted bit 5:0 (not substituted) /1 (substituted)
not topical bit 6:0 (topical) /1 (not topical)
invalid bit 7:0 (valid)/ 1 (invalid)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 251

Point Flag Options Comments

definition
M_DP(DIQ) double point bit 0:1 (off) not used
information
bit 1:1 (on)
reserved bit 2:0 not used
bit 3:0
blocked bit 4:0 (not blocked)/ 1 (blocked)
substituted bit 5:0 (not substituted)/ 1 (substituted)
not topical bit 6:0 (topical)/ 1 (not topical)
invalid bit 7:0 (valid)/ 1 (invalid)
M_ST overflow bit 0:0 (no overflow) /1 (overflow)
M_BO reserved bit 1:1 (on) not used
M_ME_A
M_ME_B bit 2:0
M_ME_C(QDS) bit 3:0
blocked bit 4:0 (not blocked) /1 (blocked)
substituted bit 5:0 (not substituted) /1 (substituted)
not topical bit 6:0 (topical) /1 (not topical)
invalid bit 7:0 (valid) /1 (invalid)
M_IT sequence bit 0...4:0...31 If the counter is frozen
(sequence notation) number once, the sequence
number increments 1.
carry bit 5/ 0 (no overflow) /1 (overflow) not supported in slave
counter bit 6:0 (not adjusted) /1 (adjusted)
adjusted
invalid bit 7:0 (valid) /1 (invalid)
Input Float Value as Scientific

The input float values, as Scientific, are supported.
252 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Long and Short Pulses

The protocol specification defines a qualifier value that is set by the master to determine the
duration of the sort or long pulse. This parameter defines the number of milliseconds to be
associated with a short or long pulse command. The configuration supports C_SC, C_DC, and C_RC
for IEC server/slave.
This figure shows the pulse duration configuration:
When client/master sends pulse command to server/slave, the pulse duration is defined by
controlled station. So the short/Long pulse duration needs to be configured on the website, and
they are effective for C_SC,C_DC, and C_RC.
short pulse duration: 100 ms by default
long pulse duration:1000 ms by default
When configuring C_SC, C_DC and C_RC in server/slave, their default qualifier needs to be set. If
you do not specify the client/master (qualifier is 0), the slave uses the pre-defined qualifier above.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 253

This figure shows the qualifier configuration, the default qualifier is persistent output:
NOTE: C_SC,C_DC, and C_RC are triggered to update their value into CPU register only when
server/slave receive command request from master, but not synchronized cyclically. Keep the
corresponding CPU register not written by PLC application for end user.
Set Measured Value

Support P_ME_NA_1, P_ME_NB_1, P_ME_NC_1 to set the low limits, high limits and threshold
of the measured, scaled and float value. The parameters of the measured points are activated
immediately after IEC 101/104 slave receives the request from IEC 101/104 master.
P_ME_A, P_ME_B, and P_ME_C in IEC 101/104 are used to set the parameter of the measured
point for M_ME_A, M_ME_B, and M_ME_C. In IEC 101/104 master, they are command to set
parameter of the measured point, but in IEC 101/104 slave they are used to store current
parameter value. It is necessary to specify the qualifier when configuration both in IEC 101/104
master and IEC 101/104 slave.
This figure shows the parameter point setting of IEC 101/104 master:
254 EIO0000000505 01/2016

In IEC 101/104 slave, its configuration is same as IEC 101/104 master except IOA corresponds to
the measure point such as M_ME_A IOA which is used to bind P_ME_A and M_ME_A.
This figure shows the parameter point setting of IEC 101/104 slave:
P_AC_A also need to bind a special IOA. It is different from P_ME_A, P_ME_B, P_ME_C, which
may be set as any IOA for all monitor point types. P_AC_A is only used to activate/deactivate cyclic
or period data transmission which is pre-defined in outstation. If outstation has no set neither of
them, cyclic data transmission is activated or deactivated by default.
This figure shows the parameter point setting of IEC 101/104 slave:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 255

Time Tag Parameter

Support control command with time tag (C_SC_TA, C_DC_TA, C_RC_TA, C_SE_TA, C_SE_TB,
C_SE_TC, C_BO_TA) on IEC 104 server/IEC 104 client
This figure shows the max command age setting IEC 104 server:
If a time tagged command is older than this period then the control operation is not taken. The
default value for this field is 30,000 milliseconds. Values: 0...600,000 ms.
When Max Command Age(ms) is set to 0, the time tag is not checked.
The parameter Max Command Age(ms) only takes effect on time tagged command. The
commands without time tag are accepted by IEC 104 server no matter how this parameter is
configured.
256 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the command with Time Tag IEC 104 client:
When command with time tag is enabled, the IEC 104 master only supports to send control
command with time tag, otherwise, sends control command without time tag.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 257

IEC Data Object Mapping
Introduction
Depending on the data object type and protocol profile selection, different configuration fields are
used in the definitions of different data object mapping items.
Exchangeable M340 CPU Data Object

Located and unlocated variables can be exchanged between the M340 CPU and the
BMX NOR 0200 H module after you have defined and managed the memory map of the M340
CPU to exchange data.
The M340 CPU data objects are mapped and only linked for the BMX NOR 0200 H module
purpose.
WARNING
Do not create an instance of redundant data access.
damage.
Data Exchanging Performance

To sustain a high rate of data exchange, we recommend that you define the RTU memory for data
objects in a continuous sequence.
NOTE: For each unlocated variable, configured length cannot exceed 1000 bytes.
Module Behavior After Unity Pro Application Transfer

NOTE:
After a Unity Pro application transfer, the following behavior occurs:
The RTU protocol service is not restarted (it is only restarted if the BMX NOR 0200 H module
IP address has been modified).
Depending on the Unity Pro application settings, PLC data could be either reset or not.
Unexpected new events may occur in case of data reset after download.
If you want the system to behave differently, uncheck the Initialize %MWi on cold start
option in the PLC configuration screen of the Unity Pro application.
If you want to reset the RTU protocol service, use the menu Reset Communication in the Web
site. It is recommended in case of modification of the number of %M or %MW variables in the Unity
Pro application.
258 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Dialog Box
Import/Export
Data object mapping items can be exported (see page 208) as a profile in the *.XSY format. Such
files can be imported into Unity Pro software.
Predefined Command List

The required input fields are requested to define a predefined command item for IEC 60870-5-
101/104 (see page 262).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 259

IEC Event Queue Setting

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the event queue setting for an item with the
This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the event management:
260 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Event Store Mode All/Most Recent All stores all events in the queue or
only stores most recent events for
each object
Time Stamp Type None/CP24/CP56 CP56 time stamp format for an event
Buffer Setting Channel by All Channels specifies whether the buffer size is
Channel/ configured by channel or not
All Channels
Max Event Count 1...65535 100 supported event count by channel;
in whole, up to 100,000 events are
supported
Max Event Count-n 0...65535 1 supported event count by virtual
channel #n
CPU Reg Type %MW %MW status register type in CPU
CPU Reg Address 0...32464 0 address of event status register in
CPU
Event Backup check box unchecked stores events in case of loss of
power
EIO0000000505 01/2016 261

IEC 60870-5-101/104 Master/Client
Predefined Master Commands

The predefined master command of the IEC 60870-5-101/104 master contains these fields:
Command Status Meaning

C_SC Yes Single point command
C_DC Double point command
C_RC Regulating step command
C_SE_A Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_B Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_C Set point command, short floating value
C_BO 32 bits, bit string command
C_IC Interrogation command
C_CI Counter interrogation command
C_RD Read command
C_CS Clock synchronization command
C_TS Test command
C_RP Reset process command
NOTE: When the C_DC address does not receive RTU master command, its initialization value is
0, and it is invalid value in C_DC_NA_1 control command by default. When the master controls this
address, the value is 1 or 2 to switch on or off.
Command Implementation Method

Commands can be mapped to the CPU memory, either:
32-bit CPU register (command and status) through %MW. Both the command and status are
16 bits.
32 bits.
Commands are implemented each time when the value in the configured CPU memory changes.
This allows the user to control easily the command implementation by changing the value in the
CPU memory.
NOTE: In order to support re-send pulse in IEC101 master and IEC104 client, the C_SC_NA and
C_DC_NA are triggered to send out on the change of low byte of CPU mapping (%MW) since
firmware V1.6 (instead of a change of last bit of CPU mapping (%MW) in previous firmware
versions).
262 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Command Status Register

Certain commands have a status register that lets the user know if the command was successfully
executed. The status register is a 16-bit word or 32-bit word. For example, if a command is mapped
to CPU register %MW1, the corresponding status register is automatically mapped to %MW2.
NOTE: When a command is mapped to a register and the command has a command status, the
status register is automatically mapped to the following register.
If a command has a result, the low byte of the status register increment by 1 to indicate that the
status is for the command. The high byte is the status of the command.
NOTE: If the high byte of command status has a result 0, this means that it has completed
successfully.
An IEC command status register contains these fields:
Status Value Description

0 The command has completed successfully.
1 A response was received but the requested command is not yet complete.
2 The command did not transmit as expected.
3 The command has timed out.
4 The command has been canceled.
P/N Control for Control Points (Firmware V1.7 or Later)

P/N bit in the Cause of Transmission field can be either controlled automatically or manually.
The P/N bit can be controlled manually for the following control point types:
C_SC
C_DC
C_SE_A
C_SE_B
C_SE_C
C_BO
To control the P/N bit:

Configure the CMD_QUALITY parameter:
Ctrl Point Type: Select the control point type.
IOA: Start IOA that corresponds to the control point type selected.
Point Count: Control point range from IOA.
CPU Register Address: %MW dedicated to manage the P/N bit.
Variable Name: Variable associated to %MW.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 263

Behavior when the quality of control point is configured (manual control):

The master sends a command.
The IEC stack checks for CMD_QUALITY settings (%MW associated to quality bit).
If the CPU program accepted the command, it puts to 0 the equivalent of P/N bit 7 in %MW.
The master receives a valid quality reply.
If the CPU program did not accept the command, it puts to 1 the equivalent of P/N bit 7 in
%MW. The master receives an invalid quality reply.
Behavior when quality of control point is not configured (automatic control):
The master sends a command.
The IEC stack manages P/N bit automatically.
264 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC Data Length & Mapping Orientation
IEC 60870-5-101/104
Only data object values are mapped. The quality descriptors for monitoring direction data object
and qualifier for control direction data object are not mapped:
Data object type Data length Orientation Availability

(bits) Master Slave/Server 101 104
M_SP 1 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_DP 2 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_ST 8 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_BO 32 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_ME_A 16 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_ME_B 16 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_ME_C 32 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
M_IT 32 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod x x
C_SC 1 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_RC 2 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_SE_A 16 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_SE_B 16 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_SE_C 32 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_BO 32 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
C_IC 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
C_CI 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
C_RD 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
C_CS 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
C_TS 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
C_RP 16 CPU -> Mod na x x
P_ME_A 16 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
P_ME_B 16 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
P_ME_C 32 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
P_AC_A 16 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU x x
EIO0000000505 01/2016 265

IEC Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT
Introduction
The RTU data object is mapped to a Unity Pro variable with EDT/DDT while exporting data objects
mapping a relationship to an *.XSY file. In addition to the variables you define, the.XSY file contains
predefined DDT types for timestamp formats.
266 EIO0000000505 01/2016

IEC 60870-5-101/104
Data object type Data length (bits) Unity Pro EDT/DDT Protocols
M_SP 1 WORD master/slave
M_DP 2 WORD
M_ST 8 WORD
M_BO 32 DWORD
M_ME_A 16 INT
M_ME_B 16 INT
M_ME_C 32 REAL
M_IT 32 DINT
M_SP + Quality 1 WORD+WORD
M_DP + Quality 2 WORD+WORD
M_ST + Quality 8 WORD+WORD
M_BO + Quality 32 DWORD+DWORD
M_ME_A + Quality 16 INT+WORD
M_ME_B + Quality 16 INT+WORD
M_ME_C + Quality 32 REAL+DWORD
M_SP + Time 1 WORD+CP56
M_DP + Time 2 WORD+CP56
M_ST + Time 8 WORD+CP56
M_BO + Time 32 DWORD+CP56
M_ME_A + Time 16 INT+CP56
M_ME_B + Time 16 INT+CP56
M_ME_C + Time 32 REAL+CP56
M_IT + Time 32 DINT+CP56
M_SP + Quality + Time 1 WORD+WORD
M_DP + Quality + Time 2 WORD+WORD+CP56
M_ST + Quality + Time 8 WORD+WORD+CP56
M_BO + Quality + Time 32 DWORD+DWORD+CP56
M_ME_A + Quality + Time 16 INT+WORD+CP56
M_ME_B + Quality + Time 16 INT+WORD+CP56
M_ME_C + Quality + Time 32 REAL+DWORD+CP56
M_IT + Quality + Time 32 DINT+DWORD+CP56
EIO0000000505 01/2016 267

Data object type Data length (bits) Unity Pro EDT/DDT Protocols
C_SC 1 WORD slave
C_DC 2 WORD
C_RC 8 WORD
C_SE_A 16 INT
C_SE_B 16 INT
C_SE_C 32 REAL
C_BO 32 DWORD
CUSTOM_CMD + Status (1) 16 WORD+WORD
C_SC + Status 1 WORD+WORD master

C_DC + Status 2 WORD+WORD
C_RC + Status 8 WORD+WORD
C_SE_A + Status 16 INT+WORD
C_SE_B + Status 16 INT+WORD
C_SE_C + Status 32 REAL+DWORD
C_BO + Status 32 DWORD+DWORD
C_IC + Status 16 WORD+WORD
C_CI + Status 16 WORD+WORD
C_RD + Status 16 WORD+WORD
C_CS + Status 16 WORD+WORD
C_TS + Status 16 WORD+WORD
C_RP + Status 16 WORD+WORD
P_ME_A + Status 16 WORD+WORD
P_ME_B + Status 16 WORD+WORD
P_ME_C + Status 32 REAL+DWORD
P_AC_A + Status 16 WORD+WORD
NOTE: The DDT format CP56 is derived from IEC60870-5-4.
268 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Section 13.3
Web Site Configuration DNP3
Web Site Configuration DNP3

Topic Page
DNP3 Master/DNP3 NET Client RTU Protocol Parameters 270
DNP3 Slave/Server RTU Protocol Parameters 276
DNP3 Channel Configuration Over UDP 284
DNP3 Data Object Mapping Page and Table 288
DNP3 Data Object Mapping 304
DNP3 Event Queue Setting 309
DNP3 Master/ DNP3 Net Client 311
DNP3 Data Length & Mapping Orientation 313
DNP3 Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT 314
EIO0000000505 01/2016 269

DNP3 Master/DNP3 NET Client RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Add a DNP3 NET master (client) in the communication setup by selecting DNP3 as Protocol,
Ethernet as Network Type and Master as Mode.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup Channel Parameters:

Session Count 1...32 1 indicates the maximum session number on this
channel
270 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Configure the module advanced parameters:

Rx Frame Size 0...292 292 indicates the maximum received message
frame size in the data link layer (bytes)
Tx Frame Size 0...292 292 indicates the maximum Transmit message
Rx Frame 0...4294967295 15000 indicates time-out while waiting for a complete
Timeout (ms) frame after receiving frame synchronization
Confirm Mode NEVER NEVER specifies when to request for link layer
SOMETIMES confirmation
ALWAYS
Confirm 0...4294967295 2000 indicates the maximum time to wait for link level
Timeout (ms) confirmation if requested
EIO0000000505 01/2016 271


Max Retries 0...255 3 indicates the retry count of link layer
confirmation time-out
Offline Poll 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period to re-establish
Period (ms) communication for an offline session
First Char 0...65535 0 indicates the minimum time between reception
Wait (ms) and transmission
Rx Buffer Size 0...65535 256 indicates the received buffer size of the serial
port
Rx Fragment 0...256 2048 indicates the maximum message frame length
Size in the data link layer (bytes)
Tx Fragment 0...20486 2048 indicates the maximum message frame length
Max Queue Size 0...2048 0 indicates the maximum request message
number with specific Application Specific Data
Unit type in the transmission queue
Channel 0...4294967295 10000 specifies how often to reestablish
Response communication for an offline session
Timeout (ms)
Analog Mode (1) All 32-bits All 32-bits specifies dynamic memory allocation for analog
Mixed Mode points.
Behavior:
All 32-bits: 32 bits are always allocated, no
matter if it is for 16 bits or 32 bits analog
input/output.
Mixed Mode: Memory allocation depends on
the analog input/output variation
(16 bits / 32 bits / float).
272 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Session Parameters
Click Setup Channel Session Parameters :

IP Address 0...255.255.255.255 192.168.0.1 indicates the source address for this session
Dest Port 1...65534 20000 indicates the destination address for this
session. IP Address of remote device (multiple
address separate by semicolon). If configured
as client, only one IP address should be given
here.
Local Address 1...65520 3 indicates the source address for this session
Slave Address 1...65520 and 4 indicates the slave address for this session
FFFC hex
Default 0...4294967295 30000 indicates the absolute maximum amount of time
Response this device waits for the final response to a
Timeout (ms) request. This time starts as soon as the request
is put into the transmit queue.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 273


Link Status 0...4294967295 2500 indicates the duration for sending link status
Period (ms) requests, if no DNP3 frames are received on
this session
Auto check box checked sends integrity data poll after the local IIN bit is
Integrity set and cleared
Local
Auto check box checked sends integrity data poll on time-out
Integrity
Timeout
Auto Event check box unchecked sends event data poll when class 1, 2, or 3
Poll IIN bit is set
Auto Delay check box unchecked indicates the usage of delay measurement in
Measure time synchronization
Auto Time Sync None/Serial/ LAN None performs time synchronization on required time:
None: no time sync
Serial: sync through serial link
LAN: sync through LAN
274 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Auto None/Enable/ None automatically send unsolicited command upon
Unsolicited Disable remote device startup:
None: do not send unsolicited command
Enable: send enable command
Disable: send disable command
Auto Enable check box checked indicates which event classes is enabled for
Unsol Class1 unsolicited reporting
Read Timeout 0...255 0 specifies number of times a read request is
Allowed allowed to time-out before the session is
considered offline
EIO0000000505 01/2016 275

DNP3 Slave/Server RTU Protocol Parameters
Introduction
Select DNP3 as Protocol, an Ethernet network as Network Type and Slave (server) as Mode.
Channel Parameters
Click Setup Channel DNP3 NET Server Parameters:
NOTE: There is no basic channel parameter to configure in the DNP3 slave/server case.

Event Backup check box unchecked Refer to the DNP3 Event Queue Setting
Enable (see page 309) topic to specify which events to
configure as backup or turned off when a power
loss occurs.
Event Restore Main Channel/All Main Channel indicates which channel the events restore
Mode Channels
276 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Configure the module advanced parameters:

Rx Frame Size 0...292 292 indicates the maximum received message
Tx Frame Size 0...292 292 indicates the maximum Transmit message
Rx Frame 0...4294967295 15000 indicates the time-out while waiting for a
Timeout (ms) complete frame after receiving frame
synchronization
Confirm Mode NEVER NEVER specifies when a link layer confirmation can be
SOMETIMES requested
ALWAYS
Confirm 0...4294967295 2000 indicates the maximum time to wait for link level
Timeout (ms) confirmation if requested
Max Retries 0...255 3 indicates the retry count of link layer
confirmation time-outs
Offline Poll 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the duration to re-establish
Period (ms) communication for an offline session
EIO0000000505 01/2016 277


First Char 0...65535 0 indicates the minimum time between reception
Wait (ms) and transmission
Rx Buffer Size 0...256 256 indicates the received buffer size of serial port
(bytes)
Rx Fragment 0...2048 2048 indicates the maximum message frame length
Tx Fragment 0...2048 2048 indicates the maximum message frame length
Analog Mode (1) All 32-bits All 32-bits specifies dynamic memory allocation for analog
Mixed Mode points.
Behavior:
All 32-bits: 32 bits are always allocated, no
matter if it is for 16 bits or 32 bits analog
input/output.
Mixed Mode: Memory allocation depends on
the analog input/output size.
Session Parameters
Click Setup Channel DNP3 NET Server Session Parameters:

Local Address 1...65520 4 indicates the source address for this session
Master 1...65520 3 indicates the destination address for this
Address session
278 EIO0000000505 01/2016

EIO0000000505 01/2016 279


Link Status 0...4294967295 2500 indicates the period to send link status requests
Period (ms) if no DNP3 frames are received on this session
Validate Source check box unchecked specifies if the source address is validated in
Address received frames
Enable Self check box unchecked responds with its own address so that the
Address master can automatically discover the slave
address
Multi Frag Resp check box checked specifies if the application is allowed to send
Allowed multi-fragment responses
Multi Frag Confirm check box checked specifies if the application layer confirmations
are requested for no final fragments of a multi-
fragment response
Respond Need Time check box unchecked specifies if this device sets the need time IIN bit
in response to this session at startup and after
the clock valid period has elapsed
Clock Valid 0...4294967295 1800000 specifies the period for which the clock remains
Period (ms) valid after receiving time synchronization
Application 0...4294967295 10000 specifies the period for which the slave DNP3
Confirm device waits for the application layer
Timeout (ms) confirmation from the master
Select 0...4294967295 5000 specifies the maximum amount of time that a
Timeout (ms) selection remains valid before the
corresponding operation is received
Warm Restart 0...65535 2000 indicates that the master should wait after
Delay (ms) receiving a response to a warm restart request
Cold Restart 0...65535 5000 indicates that the master should wait after
Delay (ms) receiving a response to a cold restart request
Allow Multi CROB check box checked determines if the objects of the Multiple Control
Requests Relay Output block are allowed in a single
request
Max Control 0...10 10 determines if the maximum number of controls
Requests are allowed in a single request
Unsol Allowed check box checked determines if the unsolicited responses are
allowed
Send Unsol When check box unchecked determines if the unsolicited null responses are
Online transmitted when the session comes online
NOTE: Only %MW and %M output points are supported in the Synch On Demand mode. To make local change
operational by CPU application on digital or analog output, select Synch On Demand mode.
280 EIO0000000505 01/2016


Unsol Class 1 check box unchecked specifies the initial/new state of the unsolicited
event mask (only RTU V1.0)
Unsol Class 1 Max 0...255 5 If unsolicited responses are enabled,
Events UnsolClassXMaxEvents specifies the
maximum number of events in the
corresponding class to be allowed before an
unsolicited response is generated.
Unsol Class 1 Max 0...4294967295 5000 specifies the maximum amount of time after an
Delay (ms) event in the corresponding class is received
before an unsolicited response is generated
Unsol Max Retries 0...65535 3 specifies the maximum number of unsolicited
retries before changing to the offline retry period
Unsol Retry Delay 0...4294967295 5000 specifies the time to delay after an unsolicited
confirmation time-out before retrying the
unsolicited response
Unsol Offline 0...4294967295 30000 specifies the time to delay after an unsolicited
Retry Delay (ms) time-out before retrying the unsolicited
response after UnsolMaxRetries are
attempted
EIO0000000505 01/2016 281


Delete Oldest check box unchecked specifies if the oldest event is removed from the
Event event queue when buffer is full and a new event
comes.
Pulse Duration 0...4294967295 1000 indicates the width of the pulse in milliseconds
Counts to Count Value Count Value specifies whether static counter data (Count
Class0Poll Frozen Value Value) or static counter frozen data (Frozen
Value) is returned in polls of class0 data
Routing Offline (1) Valid Quality Valid Quality specifies if routing point quality depends on
Invalid Quality connection state with subslave or subserver.
Behavior:
Valid Quality: Routing points quality does not
change when connection is lost.
Invalid Quality: Routing points quality is
marked as invalid when connection is lost.
Data Synch Mode Cyclic Synch Cyclic Synch specifies how the data are synchronized: either
Synch On Demand cyclically or when the slave station receives a
request from the master (see Note). It is used
only by analog outputs.
SBO Mode (1) Interference Mode Interference Mode specifies the commands allowed to cancel a
Noninterference Select command in a sequence
Mode Behavior:
Interference Mode: Select can be canceled by
any command except Operate command.
Noninterference Mode: Select can be
canceled by any command.
Trip-Close Mode (1) Even Mode Even Mode specifies if trip_close DNP3 points are
Consecutive Mode consecutive or not
PLC State (1) No Impact Quality No Impact Quality for non-routing points, specifies if the PLC state
Impact Quality modifies or not the quality bit when quality is
required by the master.
Behavior:
No Impact Quality: PLC state has no effect on
the quality bit.
Impact Quality: PLC state has an effect on the
quality bit.
A PLC in STOP state or a PLC missing
generates an invalid quality bit.
A PLC in RUN state generates a valid
quality bit.
282 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Unsolicited Response Parameters

Unsol Class x Max Events and Unsol Class x Max Delay parameters are used as
triggers to initiate unsolicited messages.
Each event class (1...3) has its own parameters. Once the trigger conditions match for at least one
event class, all event classes enabled to initiate unsolicited messages send the messages
(whether they met the trigger conditions or not).
Example:
Settings:
Unsolicited responses allowed for Class 1 + Class 2
Unsolicited responses not allowed for Class 3
Trigger condition (max events or max delay reached):

Class 1 does not meet trigger condition.
Class 2 meets trigger condition.
Class 3 is not evaluated (unsolicited response not allowed).
Result:
Class 1 + Class 2 send the events stored.
Class 3 does not send events.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 283

DNP3 Channel Configuration Over UDP
Communication Setup
Select which communication needs to be configured via the Web site before configuring the ports
of the BMX NOR 0200 H module. The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports UDP in two ways:
UDP-IP and TCP-UDP. When it is TCP-UDP, the BMX NOR 0200 H module supports the
sending/receiving of broadcast requests.
Set DNP3 NET client/DNP3 NET server over UDP:
Configuration
For UDP-IP and TCP-UDP, it is necessary to set special ports and IP address according to DNP3
specifications.
UDP-IP
Client Server
Name Description Name Description
Destination port Destination port for UDP Local port Local port for UDP; it must
be unique.
Local port Local port for UDP-IP; Destination port Destination port for UDP.
it must be unique in 0 is allowed, which means
current channel. that the server uses the port
Exception: 0 means that from which the master sent
the local port is the request.
generated automatically Unsol Port that the server uses to
by the system
destination port send initial unsolicited
responses in UDP-IP
284 EIO0000000505 01/2016

TCP-UDP
Client Server
Name Description Name Description
TCP destination Destination port for TCP TCP local port Local port for TCP
port
UDP broadcast Port that sends UDP local port Port that receives
port broadcasts in TCP-UDP broadcasts (available for
TCP-UDP)
Only one IP is allowed.

IP and port configuration of DNP3 Net client UDP-IP:
IP and port configuration of DNP3 Net client TCP-UDP:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 285

When the BMX NOR 0200 H module works as client in TCP-UDP, it can send command requests
in broadcasts. Beside broadcast address configuration, it is necessary to specify the destination
address. Here are the options of broadcast confirmation, which are used to specify the destination
address for sending broadcast requests.
Options Definition address Special use

Optional FFFF hex All-call, application layer confirmation to clear IIN1.0 is optional.
Mandatory FFFE hex All-call, application layer confirmation to clear IIN1.0 is
mandatory.
Never FFFD hex All-call, application layer confirmation must not be required to
clear IIN1.0.
Destination address configuration of broadcasts:
286 EIO0000000505 01/2016

In TCP-UDP, it depends on whether this command is broadcast or not to the client. So it is

necessary to enable it explicitly in data mapping setting:
NOTE:
Not all commands are supported in broadcast; BMX NOR 0200 H module client supports:
Restart
Time_Sync
Unsolicited_Class
Freeze_Counter
Binary_Output
Analog_Output
Freeze_Counter, Binary_Output, and Analog_Output support broadcast only when operation
mode (function code) is without acknowledgment.
Broadcasting is only supported in TCP-UDP.
The BMX NOR 0200 H module server receives and accepts the broadcast request, but does not
respond to any broadcast requests.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 287

DNP3 Data Object Mapping Page and Table
Data Object Mapping Page

example data type Binary_Input for DNP3 slave/server:
288 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the Binary_Input data object mapping with
DNP3 NET Server:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 289

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the Binary_Input data object mapping with
DNP3 NET Client:
Mapping Table
Depending on the data object type and the selected protocol profile, different configuration fields
are required to define a data object mapping item. This table describes the parameters:
Title Value scope Default value Description

Point Number 0...16777215 0 indicates the start number of the
point (1).
Point Count 1...65535 1 indicates the number of points.
CPU Register Type %M/%MW/%S/%SW/ %MW indicates the register type in CPU to
Unlocated map points (2).
CPU Register Address 0...30000 0 indicates start address of the register
in CPU. This field only taken into
account for located variables. With
%S, the range is from 0 to 127.
1: The DNP3 point number must start from 0 and be contiguous in slave/server mode. If this is not applied,
the nonconsecutive points cannot work normally.
2: DNP3 Server: %S applies only to binary inputs and %SW only to analog inputs, 32-bit analog inputs; the
CPU mapping does not apply array due to the limits of Unity Pro.
290 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Title Value scope Default value Description

Variable Name indicates the variable name of the
located or unlocated register.
Event Class Mask check box 0 defines the event class of points.
(0/1/2/3/Unsolicited) Unsolicited is not allowed with
class 0 only. In client, Channel must
be at 0.
Store To CPU (Client) OR Value only Value only Event time stamp source:
CPU Reg Mapping (Server) Value with time Value only: module time
Value with flag Value with time: time in CPU
Value with flag and registers
time Value with flag: flag info on the point
is taken from CPU registers
Value with flag and time: flag and
time are taken from CPU registers
(Default) Static g1v1 Binary In/ g1v2 g1v1 Binary In indicates the default static variation
Variation Binary In Flag for data point
Event routing (Client only)
Channel None/0 None indicates the channel number to
route
Session 0 0 indicates the session number to
route (Channel at 0)
Point number 0...16777215 0 indicates the point number to route
(Channel at 0)
Default Event g2v1 Binary Input No g2v1 Binary indicates the default event variation
Variation Time Input No Time for data point
g2v1 Binary Input
With Time
g2v1 Binary Input
Relative Time
1: The DNP3 point number must start from 0 and be contiguous in slave/server mode. If this is not applied,
the nonconsecutive points cannot work normally.
2: DNP3 Server: %S applies only to binary inputs and %SW only to analog inputs, 32-bit analog inputs; the
CPU mapping does not apply array due to the limits of Unity Pro.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 291

Configuring Unsolicited Response

The BMX NOR 0200 H supports unsolicited messages to be sent out immediately once events are
recorded.
Configuration of Unsolicited:
To check the Unsolicited parameter, you must have another Even Class Mask parameter
(other than class 0) selected. The Unsolicited parameter can be configured for Binary
Input, Double Input, Double Input, Binary Countand Analog Input in the Server.
Unsolicited with routing points (Client):
292 EIO0000000505 01/2016

In events generation, Unsolicitedmessages are sent when one of the following conditions are
met:
1. Unsolicited messages are enabled and the number of events in the buffer exceeds the
minimum amount.
2. Unsolicited messages are enabled and the delay (timeout) to report expires.
3. Events are generated for the point that is set for immediate Unsolicited message reporting,
regardless if the two conditions above are met or not.
4. Events are generated for a point that is set for immediate Unsolicited message reporting,
then all events in the buffer are immediately reported.
Quality Bit/Flag Mapping

The configuration applies quality bit/flag mapping to the CPU register for monitoring datapoints for
the DNP3 master/DNP3 slave.
NOTE: Use this feature for Binary_Input, Double_Input, Binary_Counter, Analog_Input,
Binary_Output, and Analog_Output.
This figure shows the flag configuration:
The configuration reuses Timestamp Source in the slave and Store To CPU in the master, and
expands two choices based on RTU V1.0. The DNP3 master and DNP3 slave have similar
configuration pages for quality bits and flags.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 293

Behavior:
Input and output point types apply this feature.
If the end user configures the flag in the CPU register in the slave, the module no longer
manages the flags internally. The BMX NOR 0200 H module generates events following in the
CPU register, otherwise, the BMX NOR 0200 H module generates them automatically.
In the DNP3 Net server/DNP3 slave, the change of flags in CPU can trigger the generation of
events just like value changes.
The length of the flag is 1 byte no matter how many bytes are mapped in the CPU register, the
least byte is valid. Refer to memory allocation.
This table shows the flag definition:
Point Flag definition Options Comments

Binary on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/ 1 (on-line)
Input Flags restart bit 1: 0 (normal/ 1 (restart)
communication lost bit 2: 0 (normal/ 1 (lost)
remote forced data bit 3: 0 (normal)/ 1 (forced)
local forced data bit 4: 0 (normal)/ 1 (forced)
chatter filtered bit 5: 0 (normal)/ 1 (filter on) Events are generated when the
CHATTER_FILTER flag is set and
cleared, but not when
CHATTER_FILTER is set.
reserved bit 6: 0 Not used
state bit 7: 0 /1
Binary on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/1 (on-line)
Output restart bit 1: 0 (normal/1 (restart)
Status
Flags communication lost bit 2: 0 (normal/1 (lost)
remote forced data bit 3: 0 (normal)/1 (forced)
local forced data bit 4: 0 (normal)/1 (forced)
chatter filtered bit 5: 0 Not used

reserved bit 6: 0
state bit 7: 0 /1
294 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Point Flag definition Options Comments

Double on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/1 (on-line)
Input Flags restart bit 1: 0 (normal/1 (restart)
communication lost bit 2: 0 (normal/1 (lost)
chatter filtered bit 5: 0 (normal)/1 (filter on) Events are generated when
CHATTER_FILTER flag is set and
cleared, but not when it is set.
state bit 6: 0/1 Not used
state bit 7: 0/1
Analog on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/1 (on-line)
Input Flags restart bit 1: 0 (normal/1 (restart)
over range bit 5: 0 (normal)/1 (over range)
reference error bit 6: 0 (normal)/1 (error)
Analog on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/1 (on-line)
Output restart bit 1: 0 (normal/1 (restart)
Status
Flags communication lost bit 2: 0 (normal/1 (lost)
over range bit 5: 0 (normal)/1 (over range)
reference error bit 6: 0 (normal)/1 (error)
Counter on-line bit 0: 0 (off-line)/1 (on-line)
Flags
restart bit 1: 0 (normal/1 (restart)
roll over bit 5: 0 Not used
discontinuity bit 6: 0 (normal)/1
(discontinuity)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 295

Binary Output Status and Analog Output Status

The Binary_Output_Status and Analog_Output_Status are applied in the master, which are
used to save the latest value, state (flag), and timestamp.
This figure shows the binary output status:
296 EIO0000000505 01/2016

This figure shows the analog output status:
NOTE: Floating point values (scientific notation) can be entered for the deadband.
Behavior of a Binary Output

The configuration applies latch on/off, pulse on, and close/trip pulse on:
TCC (Trip-Close Code) Operation type field Control code Point model in outstation
None pulse on 01 hex activation
latch on 03 hex latch complement
latch off 04 hex
Close pulse on 41 hex twos complement
Trip 81 hex
EIO0000000505 01/2016 297

This figure shows the selection of control code type:
The DNP3 master only provides on-time configuration, but does not provide configured off-time
and count. The DNP3 slave also only applies pulse on which the count is 1 and the off-time
value is 0.
Twos complement trip and close are provided for a single index in the DNP3 master, but two
separately physical outputs in the DNP3 slave. For example, a close/pulse on request for a
specific DNP3 index is mapped to a specific relay output, whereas a trip/pulse on request for
the same DNP3 index is mapped to another different relay output which follows the specific
relay output (close) in the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
CROB sent in DNP3 master Point number in Point number in

DNP3 master DNP3 slave
Pulse on 0 0
Trip/Pulse on 0 1
Close/Pulse on 2 2
Trip/Pulse on 2 3
Close/Pulse on n+2 n+2
Trip/Pulse on n+2 n+2+1
In the DNP3 slave, it is decided by configuration whether the point index applies trip/close request.
As the trip/close need to bind a couple of points, the point count is even in the configuration.
298 EIO0000000505 01/2016

The following figure shows the selection of TCC:
TCC parameter: The usage of Trip_Close mode depends on the Trip-Close Mode
(see page 278) parameter setting (Channel Session Advanced Parameter).
When Trip-Close Mode is in Even Mode, the behavior is as follows: the close command
controls the even point and the trip command controls the odd point.
When Trip-Close Mode is in Consecutive Mode, the behavior is as follows: the binary output
occupies two registers in the CPU memory (%MWs or %Ms). The low register is for the close
command and the high register is for the trip command.
CROB usage in master
Op type field Trigger mechanism Description

Close/Pulse_on any value change pulse on if value change
(0...65535)
Latch_on 0 to 1 latch on
Latch off 1 to 0 latch off
Close/Pulse_on 0 to 1 pulse on for close output
Trip/Pulse_on 1 to 0 pulse on for trip output
Binary output in DNP3 slave is only updated in CPU register only after receiving command from
DNP3 master, but not synchronized cyclically. Keep the corresponding CPU register not written
any more.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 299

Long and Short Pulses of Binary Outputs

This figure shows the pulse duration setting of the master:
This figure shows the pre-configured pulse duration of the slave:
NOTE: The outstation uses the entered pulse duration. The value 0 indicates that the device uses
a pre-configured value.
300 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Set Measured Value

Apply analog input dead band (obj34) to set deadhead of measured value. The parameters of the
measured points are activated immediately after the DNP3 slave receives the request from the
DNP3 master.
For DNP3 obj34, there is no qualifier to set as it only applies the parameter deadband. Set the
static variation and point number at the same setting of the analog input. Analog input deadband
is applied both on the DNP3 master and the DNP3 slave. DNP3 master uses it to store the current
value which is reported in the response of read requests, the DNP3 slave uses it to display the
current deadband value which can be controlled by the master through the analog input
deadband control block.
This figure shows the parameter point setting of deadband:
This figure shows the parameter point setting of deadband control block:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 301

Generating Events on Demand

This feature generates events on demand regardless of value and state. Data is pushed to the
event queue even if the tag value has not changed. It generates events for any specified point type.
Gen_Events can be created only for DNP3 Slave/Server; select Data Mapping:
Parameter Value Scope Default Value Definition

Object Group Binary Input Binary Input specifies the object group whose event must be
Double Input generated on demand
Binary Counter
Analog Input
Binary Output
Analog Output
Start Point 0..16777215 0 specifies the start point number of the specified
Number object group
Point Count 1...5000 5000 specifies the point number to generate events
5000: the actual count depends on the point
number of the object groups configuration)
CPU Register %MW %MW indicates the register type in the CPU to map
Type points to; only the %MW type is supported
CPU Register 0...32464 0 indicates the start address of the register in the
Address CPU. Effective for the located variables only
Variable indicates the name of the located register
Name
Analog input supports events in either Class1, Class2, or Class3 options. If the value of
Gen_Events register has changes, the BMX NOR 0200 H will record the events for the Analog
Input specified in the configuration although its value has no change.
It is possible to control Gen_Events in SCADA after mapping the CPU register with Binary
Output.
302 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Clearing Events on Demand

Clear_Events supports a new point type which clears the event buffer in the DNP3 Server/Slave.
It enables the user to clear the events buffer in a local or remote SCADA through mapping memory.
Clear_Events can be created only for DNP3 Slave/Server; select Data Mapping.
When the value of Clear_Events register has changes, the BMX NOR 0200 H clears the events
of the object group in configuration.
Parameter Value Scope Default Value Definition

Object Group All Objects All Objects specifies the object group whose event must be
Binary Input cleared on demand
Double Input
Binary Counter
Analog Input
Binary Output
Analog Output
Channel 0..255 255 (all the specifies the channel number to clear
Number channels) (it depends on channel configuration)
CPU Register %MW %MW indicates the register type in the CPU to map
Type points to; only the %MW type is supported
CPU Register 0...32464 0 indicates the start address of the register in the
Address CPU. Effective for the located variables only
Variable indicates the name of the located register
Name
EIO0000000505 01/2016 303

DNP3 Data Object Mapping
Introduction
Depending on the data object type and protocol profile selection, different configuration fields are
used in the definitions of different data object mapping items.
Exchangeable M340 CPU Data Object

Located and unlocated variables can both be exchanged between the M340 CPU and the
BMX NOR 0200 H module after you have defined and managed the memory map of the
M340 CPU to exchange data with the module.
The M340 CPU data objects are mapped and only linked for the BMX NOR 0200 H module
purpose.
WARNING
Do not create an instance of redundant data access.
damage.
Data Exchanging Performance

To sustain a high rate of data exchange, we recommend that you define the RTU memory for data
objects in a continuous sequence.
NOTE: For each unlocated variable, the configured length cannot exceed 1000 bytes.
Module Behavior after Unity Pro Application Transfer

NOTE:
After a Unity Pro application transfer, the following behavior occurs:
The RTU protocol service is not restarted (it is only restarted if the BMX NOR 0200 H module
IP address has been modified).
Depending on the Unity Pro application settings, PLC data could be either reset or not.
Unexpected new events may occur in case of data reset after download.
To avoid this behavior, uncheck the Initialize %MWi on cold start option in the PLC configuration
screen of the Unity Pro application.
If you want to reset the RTU protocol service, use the menu Reset Communication in the Web site.
It is recommended in case of modification of the number %M or %MW variables in Unity Pro
application.
304 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Dialog Box
example data type M_SP for the DNP3 slave/server:
Import/Export
Data object Mapping items can be exported (see page 208) as a profile in the *.XSY format. Such
files can be imported into Unity Pro software.
Predefined Command List

The required input fields are requested to define a predefined command item for DNP3
master/DNP3 NET client (see page 311).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 305

Static Variation Name of DNP3
Data object type Static variation

Binary Input g1v1 Binary In
g1v2 Binary In Flag
Double Input g3v1 Double In
g3v2 Double In Flag
Binary Output g10v1 Binary Out
g10v2 Binary Out Flag
Binary Counter g20v1 32bit Counter
g20v2 16bit Counter
g20v5 32bit Ctr No Flag
g20v6 16bit Ctr No Flag
Frozen Counter g21v1 32bit Frozen Ctr Flag
g21v2 16bit Frozen Ctr Flag
g21v5 32bit Frozen Ctr Flag Time
g21v6 16bit Frozen Ctr Flag Time
g21v9 32bit Frozen Counter
g21v10 32bit Frozen Counter
Analog Input g30v1 32bit Analog In
g30v2 16bit Analog In
g30v3 32bit AI No Flag
g30v4 16bit AI No Flag
g30v5 Short Float AI
Analog Input Deadband g34v1 16bit AI Deadband
g34v2 32bit AI Deadband
g34v3 Short Float AI Deadband
Analog Input Dband_Ctrl g34v1 16bit AI Deadband
g34v2 32bit AI Deadband
g34v3 Short Float AI Deadband
Analog Output g40v1 32bit Analog Output
g40v2 16bit Analog Output
g40V3 Short Float AO
306 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Data object type Static variation

Read_Group
Freeze_Counter
Unsolicited_Class
Time_Sync
Restart
Integrity_Poll
Gen_Events
Clear_Events
Event Variation Name of DNP3
Data object type Event variation

Binary Input g2v1 Binary Input No Time
g2v2 Binary Input With Time
g2v3 Binary Input Relative Time
Double Input g4v1 Double Input No Time
g4v2 Double Input With Time
g4v3 Double Input Relative Time
Binary Output g11v1 Binary Out No Time
g11v2 Binary Out With Time
Binary Counter g22v1 32bit Counter No Time
g22v2 16bit Counter No Time
g22v5 32bit Counter With Time
g22v6 16bit Counter With Time
Frozen Counter g23v1 32bit Frozen Ctr No Time
g23v2 16bit Frozen Ctr No Time
g23v5 32bit Frozen Ctr With Time
g23v6 16bit Frozen Ctr With Time
Analog Input g32v1 32bit Analog In No Time
g32v2 16bit Analog In No Time
g32v3 32bit Analog In With Time
g32v4 16bit Analog In With Time
g32v5 Short Float AI No Time
g32v7 Short Float AI With Time
EIO0000000505 01/2016 307

Data object type Event variation

Analog Output g42v1 32bit Analog Out No Time
g42v2 16bit Analog Out No Time
g42v3 32bit Analog Out With Time
g42v4 16bit Analog Out With Time
g42v5 Short Float AO No Time
g42v7 Short Float AO With Time
This figure shows the data type:
308 EIO0000000505 01/2016

DNP3 Event Queue Setting

This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the event queue setting for an item with the
example data type Binary_Input for DNP3 slave/server:
This figure shows the dialog box for configuring the event queue setting:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 309


value
Event Store All/Most All stores all event in queue or only stores most
Mode Recent recent event for each object
Buffer All Channels, All specifies whether the buffer size is
Setting By Channel Channels configured by channel or not; all channels
support up to 10,000 events
Max Event 1...65535 100 supported event count by channel; in whole,
Count up to 100,000 events are supported
Max Event 0...65535 1 supports event count for virtual channel #n
Count-n
CPU Reg Type %MW %MW status register type in CPU
CPU Reg 0...32464 0 address of event status register in CPU
Address
Event Backup checked/ unchecked what is backed up in event of power loss
unchecked
NOTE: When BMX NOR 0200 H module uses IEC/DPN3 server or slave, the events status is
mapped into CPU Register Address. One event status occupies two %MW. The first %MW is for
event number and the second is used to save overflow bits. If the number of channels is more than
one, the events of virtual channel follows the first channel event status.
Example of the setting of the event status:
Channel Count: 2
CPU Reg Address: 1000
Channel 0 Event Status: %MW1000/%MW1001
Channel 1 Event Status: %MW1002/%MW1003
310 EIO0000000505 01/2016

DNP3 Master/ DNP3 Net Client
Predefined Master Command

The predefined master command of the DNP3 master contains these fields:
Command Status Meaning

Read_Class Yes read class command
Read_Group Yes read group command
Freeze_Counter Yes freeze counter command
Unsolicited_Class Yes class unsolicited command
Time_Sync Yes time synchronization command
Restart Yes restart command
Command Implementation Method

Commands can be mapped to the CPU memory, either:
16 bits.
64-bit CPU register (command and status) through %MW. Both command and status are
32 bits.
Commands are implemented each time when the value in the configured CPU memory changes.
This allows the user to control easily the command implementation by changing the value in the
CPU memory.
NOTE: In DNP3 master/client, the binary output is triggered to send out on the change of low byte
of CPU mapping (%MW) since firmware V1.6 (instead of a change of last bit of CPU mapping
(%MW) in previous firmware versions).
Command Status Register

Certain commands have a status register that lets the user know if the command was successfully
executed. The status register is a 16-bit word. For example, if a command is mapped to CPU
register %MW1, the corresponding status register is automatically mapped to %MW2.
NOTE: When a command is mapped to a register and the command has a command status, the
status register is automatically mapped to the following register.
If a command has a result, the low byte of the status register increments automatically to indicate
that the status is for the command. The high byte is the status of the command.
NOTE: If the high byte of command status has a result 0, this means that it has completed
successfully.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 311

A DNP3 command status register contains these fields:
Status value Description

0 The command has completed successfully.
1 A response was received but the requested command is not yet complete.
2 The command did not transmit as expected.
3 The command has timed out.
4 The command has been canceled.
5 The response to a select or an execute did not echo the request.
6 The command did not execute.
7 The response to a command had IIN bits set indicating that the command
was not executed.
312 EIO0000000505 01/2016

DNP3 Data Length & Mapping Orientation
DNP3
Data object type Data length Orientation

(bits) Master Slave/Server
Binary Input 1 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod
Double Input 2 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod
Binary Output 1 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU
Binary Counter 32 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod
Analog Input 32 Mod -> CPU CPU -> Mod
Analog Output 32 CPU -> Mod Mod -> CPU
Read_Class 16 CPU -> Mod
Read_Group 16 CPU -> Mod
Freeze_Counter 16 CPU -> Mod
Unsolicited_Class 16 CPU -> Mod
Time_Sync 16 CPU -> Mod
Restart 16 CPU -> Mod
Gen_Events 16 CPU -> Mod
Clear_Events 16 CPU -> Mod
EIO0000000505 01/2016 313

DNP3 Data Object Type Mapped to Unity Pro EDT/DDT
Introduction
The RTU data object is mapped to a Unity Pro variable with EDT/DDT while exporting data objects
mapping a relationship to an *.XSY file. In addition to the variables you define, the.XSY file contains
predefined DDT types for timestamp formats.
DNP3
Data object type Data Unity Pro EDT/DDT Protocol

length
(bits)
Binary Input 1 WORD master/slave
Double Input 2 WORD
Binary Counter 32 DWORD
Analog Input 32 DINT/REAL
Analog Input Deadband 32 DINT/REAL
Binary Input + Time 1 WORD+CP56
Double Input + Time 2 WORD+CP56
Binary Counter + Time 32 DWORD+CP56
Analog Input + Time 32 DINT/REAL+CP56
Binary Input + Flag 1 WORD+WORD
Double Input + Flag 2 WORD+WORD
Binary Counter + Flag 32 DWORD+DWORD
Analog Input + Flag 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD
Binary Input + Flag + Time 1 WORD+WORD+CP56
Double Input + Flag + Time 2 WORD+WORD+CP56
Binary Counter + Flag + Time 32 DWORD+DWORD+CP56
Analog Input + Flag + Time 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD+CP56
Binary Output Status 1 WORD
Binary Output Status + Time 1 WORD+CP56
Binary Output Status + Flag 1 WORD+WORD master
Binary Output Status + Flag + Time 1 WORD+WORD+CP56
314 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Data object type Data Unity Pro EDT/DDT Protocol

length
(bits)
Binary Output Status Flag 8 WORD slave
Analog Output Status 32 DINT/REAL
Analog Output Status + Time 32 DINT/REAL+CP56 master/slave
Analog Output Status + Flag 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD master
Analog Output Status + Time 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD+CP56
Analog Output Status Flag 8 WORD slave
Binary Output + Status 1 WORD+WORD master
Analog Output + Status 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD
Read_Class + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Read_Group + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Freeze_Counter + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Unsolicited_Class + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Time_Sync + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Restart + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Gen_Events 16 WORD+WORD
Clear_Events 16 WORD+WORD
Integrity_Poll + Status 16 WORD+WORD
Analog Input Dband + Status 32 DINT/REAL+DWORD
NOTE: The DNP type of analog I/O data objects can be converted to REAL according to your
application requirements.
NOTE: The BMX NOR 0200 H module only supports to send Integrity Poll command
periodically. It can be realized by programming in PLC application. It is recommended that the
period in PLC scan period be longer than 200 milliseconds.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 315

CP56Time2a
CP56 Element Type Definition

ms (milliseconds) WORD 2 bytes for milliseconds from 0 to 59999
minute BYTE Bit 0...5: Minutes from 0 to 59
Bit 6: Indicates Genuine Time or Substituted Time.
0 = the time tag was added to the information object when it was
acquired by the RTU (Genuine Time).
1 = the time tag was substituted by intermediate equipment, such
as concentrator stations, or the controlling station itself
(Substituted Time).
Bit 7: Indicates the validity of the time stamp when time
synchronization is lost.
0 = Valid Time
1 = Invalid Time
hour BYTE Bit 0...4: Hours from 0 to 23

Bit 5: Reserved (always 0)
Bit 7: Indicates the present valid time. The summer bit (SU) may be
used as additional information.
0 = Standard Time
1 = Summer Time
monthday BYTE Bit 0...4: Day of month from 1 to 31

Bit 5...7: Day of week from 1 to 7
month BYTE Bit 0...3: Months from 1 to 12
Bit 4...7: Reserved (always 0)
year BYTE Bit 0...6: Years from 0 to 99 (1/1/xx00 to 31/12/xx99)
The Summer Bit parameter is supported in the timestamp IEC60870 and can be set in the CPU
mapping register with the DDT CP56Time2a parameter.
NOTE: BMX NOR0200H uses the summer bit to determine the time in the time zone. The SCADA
must also set the summer bit for time synchronization.
316 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Web Designer Configuration
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Chapter 14
Introduction
This chapter describes the Web Designer configuration software for setting up the variable list and
additional functions such as DataLogging, email services, and data table lists.
Refer to Web Designer for FactoryCast, User Manual (see page 11) for a detailed Web Designer
presentation.

Topic Page
Create a Project 318
PLC Device Configuration 321
Data Editor Configuration 322
Transfer 323
EIO0000000505 01/2016 317

Create a Project
Web Designer Project Creation Wizard

Once the project is created, the Web Designer treeview provides the classic menus, data tables,
services, and website, but without the graphic screens:
318 EIO0000000505 01/2016

When you select the BMX NOR 0200 H module in the Target List, the Modicon M340 is available
as a device in the Device List:
EIO0000000505 01/2016 319

Once the project is created, the Web Designer treeview provides the classic menus, data tables,
services, and website, but without the graphic screens:
1 Name of the project

2 Target associated with the project
3 Directories associated with the project
320 EIO0000000505 01/2016

PLC Device Configuration
Variables List Configuration

The BMX NOR 0200 H module does not support extracted bit variables. An extracted bit is a bit in
%MW or %SW, for example %MW900.2 of BOOL type.The EBOOL type can be used.
Email, SMS and datalogging do not work with the import of extracted bits.
NOTE: Do not use extracted bit variables.
The BMX NOR 0200 H module supports STU/XVM program file imports. It allows you to create a
customized list of variables that can be used in other services such as datalogging or email
services and in data table animations:
NOTE: Check the Persistent box for the variables used in datalogging or email services.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 321

Data Editor Configuration
Create Data Editor Tables

After the variable repository is created, you can import the variables to the Data table editor. It
allows you to create tables that monitor values on the website. These tables need to be transferred
to the target to be used online:
Variables that can be written are accessible only by trained personnel (password protect).
WARNING
UNINTENDED OPERATION
Apply password protection to limit access to the Data Editor.
damage.
322 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Transfer
Transfer the Project

Use the transfer function to transfer the project to the BMX NOR 0200 H module. The transfer can
run in two directions, indicated by your selection in the Direction column of the Transfer Status
dialog box. You can transfer from the PC to the target or from the target to the PC:
NOTE: The Web Designer does not transfer or reset protocols. Use the web interface of the
EIO0000000505 01/2016 323

324 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Appendices
Introduction
These technical appendices supplement the information in this guide.
What Is in This Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:
A Interoperability 327
B Ethernet Language Objects 395
EIO0000000505 01/2016 325

326 EIO0000000505 01/2016
Modicon X80 RTU
Interoperability
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Appendix A
Interoperability
Interoperability
About this Chapter

This chapter describes the specific implementation of protocols with theBMX NOR 0200 H module.

Topic Page
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master 328
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave 339
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Client 350
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Server 360
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master 370
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave 381
EIO0000000505 01/2016 327

Interoperability
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master
Introduction
The purpose of this information is to describe the specific implementation of the IEC 60870-5-101
within BMX NOR 0200 H as master.
This information and the documents listed below provide detailed information on how to
communicate with BMX NOR 0200 H as master via IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-101 = Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks
IEC 60870-5-5 = Basic Application Functions
IEC 60870-5-2 = Link Transmission Procedures
IEC 60870-5-4 = Definition and Coding of Application Information Elements
IEC 60870-5-3 = General Structure of Application Data
IEC 60870-5-1 = Transmission Frame Formats
Interoperability
This companion standard presents sets of parameters and alternatives from which you select
subsets to implement particular telecontrol systems. Certain parameter values, such as the
number of octets in the COMMON ADDRESS of ASDUs represent mutually exclusive alternatives.
This means that only one value of the defined parameters is admitted per system. Other
parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in command and in monitor
direction allow the specification of the complete set or subsets, as appropriate for given
applications.This Clause summarizes the parameters of the previous Clauses to facilitate a
suitable selection for a specific application. If a system is composed of equipment stemming from
different manufacturers, it is necessary that all partners agree on the selected parameters.
The selected parameters are marked as follows:
- Function or ADSU is not used

X Function or ADSU is used
System or Device
- System definition
X Controlling station definition (master)
- Controlled station definition (slave)
Network Configuration
X Point-to-point X Multipoint-part line

X Multi point-to-point X Multipoint-star
328 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Physical Layer
Transmission speed (control direction)

Unbalanced interchange Unbalanced interchange Balanced interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit X.24/X.27
Standard Recommended if>1200-bit/s
- 100 bit/s X 2400 bit/s X 2400 bit/s - 56000 bit/s
X 300 bit/s X 9600 bit/s X 9600 bit/s
X 600 bit/s X 19200 bit/s
X 1200 bit/s X 38400 bit/s
Standard Recommended if>1200-bit/s
X 1200 bit/s X 38400 bit/s
Link Layer
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1 and the fixed time out interval are used exclusively in this
companion standard.
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ASDU types are returned in class 2 messages
(low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:
Link transmission procedure Address field of link

X Balance transmission X Not present (balanced transmission only)
X Unbalance transmission X One octet
X Two octets
- Structured
- Unstructured
EIO0000000505 01/2016 329

Interoperability
Frame length
255 Maximum frame length L (control direction)
255 Maximum frame length L (monitor direction)
Configurable Time during which repetitions are permitted (Trp) or numbers of repetitions
X The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows
Type identification Cause of transmission
9/11/13/21 <1>
- A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages
- -
Application Layer
Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively
in this companion standard
Common address of ASDU
X One octet X Two octets
Information object address
X One octet - Structured
X Two octets - Unstructured
X Three octets
Cause of transmission
X One octet X Two octets (with originator address). Set to
zero in case of no originator address
330 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Process information in monitor direction

X <1> Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
X <2> Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
X <3> Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
X <4> Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
X <5> Step position information M_ST_NA_1
X <6> Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
X <7> Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
X <8> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
X <9> Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
X <10> Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
X <11> Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
X <12> Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
X <13> Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_I
X <14> Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
X <15> <15> Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
X <16> <16> Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
- <17> <17> Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
- <18> <18> Packed start events of protection equipment with time M_EP_TB_1
tag
- <19> Packed output circuit information of protection equipment M_EP_TC_1
with time tag
- <20> Packed single-point information with status change M_PS_NA_1
detection
- <21> Measured value, normalized value without quality M_ME_ND_1
descriptor
X <30> Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
X <31> Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_DP_TB_1
X <32> Step position information with time tag CP56Time2A M_ST_TB_1
X <33> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2A M_BO_TB_1
X <34> Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TD_1
CP56Time2A
EIO0000000505 01/2016 331

Interoperability

X <35> Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TE_1
X <36> Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TF_1
CP56Time2A
X <37> Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2A M_IT_TB_1
- <38> Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TD_1
- <39> Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TE_1
CP56time2A
- <40> Packed output circuit information of protection equipment M_EP_TF_1
with time tag CP56Time2a
Process information in control direction

X <45> Single command C_SC_NA_1
X <46> Double command C_DC_NA_1
X <47> Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
X <48> Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
X <49> Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
X <50> Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
X <51> Bitstring of 32-bit C_BO_NA_1
System information in monitor direction

X <70> End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

X <100> Single command C_IC_NA_1
X <101> Double command C_CI_NA_1
X <102> Regulating step command C_RD_NA_1
X <103> Set point command, normalized value C_CS_NA_1
X <104> Set point command, scaled value C_TS_NB_1
X <105> Set point command, short floating point value C_RP_NC_1
- <106> Bitstring of 32-bit C_CD_NA_1
332 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Parameter in control direction

X <110> Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
X <111> Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
X <112> Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
X <113> Parameter activation PC_AC_NA_1
File transfer
- <120> File ready F_FR_NA_1
- <121> Section ready F_SR_NA_1
- <122> Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
- <123> Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
- <124> Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
- <125> Segment F_SG_NA_1
- <126> Directory F_DR_NA_1

Request by group <n> counter request
Unknown information object address

Unknown common address of ASDU
Return info caused by a remote cmd
Return info caused by a local cmd
Interrogated by group <number>
Unknown cause of transmission

unknown type identification
Deactivation confirmation
Activation confirmation
Activation termination
Request or requested
Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1 X X X X
<3> M_DP_NA_1 X X X X X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1 X X X X
<5> M_ST_NA_1 X X X X X X
<6> M_ST_TA_1 X X X X
EIO0000000505 01/2016 333

Interoperability


Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<7> M_BO_NA_1 X X X X
<8> M_BO_TA_1 X X
<9> M_ME_NA_1 X X X X X
<10> M_ME_TA_1 X X
<11> M_ME_NB_1 X X X X X
<12> M_ME_TB_1 X X
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1 X X
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1 X X
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1 X X X X
<32> M_ST_TB_1 X X X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1 X X
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<47> C_RC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<48> C_SE_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
334 EIO0000000505 01/2016

<70>
<51>
<50>
<49>
<113>
<112>
<111>
<110>
<105>
<104>
<103>
<102>
<101>
<100>
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Type identification
P_AC_NA_1
P_ME_NC_1
P_ME_NB_1
P_ME_NA_1
C_RP_NA_1
C_TS_NA_1
C_CS_NA_1
C_RD_NA_1
C_CI_NA_1
C_IC_NA_1
M_EI_NA_1
C_BO_NA_1
C_SE_NC_1
C_SE_NB_1
1
Periodic, cyclic
2
Background scan
X
Spontaneous
X
Initialized
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Activation
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Deactivation
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
File transfer
X
X
X

10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

44 45 46 47
335
Interoperability
Interoperability
Basic Application Functions
Station initialization
X Remote initialization
Cyclic data transmission
X Cyclic data transmission
Read procedure
X Read procedure
Spontaneous transmission
X Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous
- Single-point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 and M_PS_NA_1
- Double-point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 and M_DP_TB_1
- Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1 and M_ST_TB_1
- Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1 and M_BO_TB_1
- Measure value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 and M_ME_TD_1
- Measure value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 and M_ME_TE_1
- Measure value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation
X Global
X Group1 X Group 7 X Group 13
X Group 2 X Group 8 X Group 14
X Group 5 X Group 11
X Group 6 X Group 12 Addresses per group have to be
defined
Clock synchronization
X Clock synchronization
X Day of week used
X RES1, GEN (time tag substituted/ not substituted) used
X SU-bit (summer time) used
336 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Command transmission
X Direct command transmission X Select and execute command
X Direct set point command X Select and execute set point command
transmission
X C-SE-ACTTERM used
- No additional definition)
X Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter inn the outstation)
X Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter inn the outstation)
X Persistent output
Transmission of integrated totals
- Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous
- Mode B: Local freeze with counter
X Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter interrogation
- Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported
X Counter read
X Counter freeze with reset
X counter freeze without reset
X Counter reset
X General request counter
X Counter reset
X Request counter group 1
Parameter loading
X Threshold value
- Smoothing factor
X Low limit for transmission of measured value
X High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation
X Act/Deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure
X Test procedure
EIO0000000505 01/2016 337

Interoperability
File transfer
File transfer in monitor direction
- Transparent file
- Transmission of disturbance data of protection
- Transmission of sequences of events
- Transmission of sequences of recorded analog value
File transfer in control direction
- Transparent file
Background scan
X Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay
X Acquisition of transmission delay
338 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
IEC 60870-5-101 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave
Introduction
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the IEC 60870-5-101
within BMX NOR 0200 H as slave.
This document and the documents listed below provide detailed information on how to
communicate with BMX NOR 0200 Has slave via the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol
IEC 60870-5-2 = Link Transmission Procedures
IEC 60870-5-1 = Transmission Frame Formats
Interoperability
subsets selected to implement particular telecontrol systems. Certain parameter values, such as
the number of octets in the COMMON ADDRESS of ASDUs represent mutually exclusive
alternatives. This means that only one value of the defined parameters is admitted per system.
Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in command and in
monitor direction allow the specification of the complete set or subsets, as appropriate for given
applications.This Clause summarizes the parameters of the previous Clauses to facilitate a
suitable selection for a specific application. If a system is composed of equipment stemming from
different manufacturers, it is necessary that all partners agree on the selected parameters.

System or Device
- System definition
- Controlling station definition (master)
X Controlled station definition (slave)
Network Configuration
X Point-to-point X Multipoint-part line

X Multi point-to-point X Multipoint-star
EIO0000000505 01/2016 339

Interoperability
Physical Layer
Transmission speed (control direction)

Standard Recommended if > 1200 bit/s
- 100 bit/s X 2400 bit/s X 2400 bit/s
- 200 bit/s X 4800 bit/s X 4800 bit/s
X 1200 bit/s X 38400 bit/s
- 56000 bit/s
- 64000 bit/s
Transmission speed (monitor direction)
Standard Recommended if > 1200 bit/s
- 100 bit/s X 2400 bit/s X 2400 bit/s
- 200 bit/s X 4800 bit/s X 4800 bit/s
X 1200 bit/s X 38400 bit/s
- 56000 bit/s
- 64000 bit/s
Link Layer
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1 and the fixed time out interval are used exclusively in this
companion standard.
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ASDU types are returned in class 2 messages
(low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:
Link transmission procedure Address field of link

X Balance transmission X Not present (balanced
transmission only)
X Unbalance transmission X One octet
X Two octets
- Structured
- Unstructured
340 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Frame length
255 Maximum frame length L (control direction)
255 Maximum frame length L (monitor direction)
Configurable Time during which repetitions are permitted (Trp) or number of repetitions
X The standard assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
9/11/13/21 <1>
X A special assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
1/3/5/7/9/11/13/20/21/110/111/112 <2>
Application Layer

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used
exclusively in this companion standard
X One octet X Two octets
X One octet - Structured
X Two octets - Unstructured
X Three octets
X One octet X Two octets (with originator address). Set to
zero in case of no originator address

X <2> Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
X <4> Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
X <6> Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
EIO0000000505 01/2016 341

Interoperability

X <8> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
X <10> Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
X <12> Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
X <14> Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
X <15> Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
X <16> Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
- <17> Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
- <18> Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
- <19> Packed output circuit information of protection equipment M_EP_TC_1
with time tag
detection
descriptor
X <31> Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_DP_TB_1
X <32> Step position information with time tag CP56Time2A M_ST_TB_1
X <33> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2A M_BO_TB_1
CP56Time2A
X <35> Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TE_1
CP56Time2A
X <37> Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2A M_IT_TB_1
- <38> Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TD_1
CP56time2A
342 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability



X <100> Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
X <101> Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
X <102> Read command C_RD_NA_1
X <103> Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
X <104> Test command C_TS_NB_1
X <105> Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
X <106> Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1

X <112> Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
X <113> Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
EIO0000000505 01/2016 343

Interoperability
File transfer
- <126> Directory F_DR_TA_1


Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20... 36 37... 41 44 45 46 47
<2> M_SP_TA_1 X X X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1 X X X X
<6> M_ST_TA_1 X X X X
<8> M_BO_TA_1 X X
<10> M_ME_TA_1 X X
344 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability


Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20... 36 37... 41 44 45 46 47
<12> M_ME_TB_1 X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1 X X
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1 X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1 X X
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<49> C_SE_NB_1 X X X X X X X X X
<50> C_SE_NC_1 X X X X X X X X X
<51> C_BO_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<70> M_EI_NA_1 X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X X
EIO0000000505 01/2016 345

346
<113>
<112>
<111>
<110>
<106>
<105>
<104>
<103>
<102>
<101>
Interoperability
Type identification
P_AC_NA_1
P_ME_NC_1
P_ME_NB_1
P_ME_NA_1
C_CD_NA_1
C_RP_NA_1
C_TS_NA_1
C_CS_NA_1
C_RD_NA_1
C_CI_NA_1
1
Periodic, cyclic
2
Background scan
X
X
Spontaneous
4
Initialized
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Activation
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Deactivation
X
X
File transfer
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

10 11 12 13 20... 36 37... 41 44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

45 46 47
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Interoperability
Read procedure
X Read procedure
- Double-point information
- Step position information
- Bitstring of 32 bit
- Measure value, normalized value
- Measure value, scaled value
- Measure value, short floating point number
X Global X Group 9
X Group1 X Group 10
X Group 8
X Day of week used
X SU-bit (summertime) used
EIO0000000505 01/2016 347

Interoperability
X Direct command transmission X Select and execute command
X Direct set point command X Select and execute set point command
transmission
X C-SE-ACTTERM used
x No additional definition
x Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
x Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
X Persistent output
X Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
X Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
X Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
X Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation commands, frozen values reported
spontaneously
X Counter read
X Counter freeze without reset
X Counter reset
X Request counter group 1...4
Parameter loading
X Threshold value
X Smoothing factor
- Low limit for transmission of measured value
X High limit for transmission of measured value
x Act/Deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure
X Test procedure
File transfer
- Transparent file
- Transmission of disturbance data of protection
- Transmission of sequences of recorded analog value
348 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

- Transparent file
Background scan
X Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay
X Acquisition of transmission delay
EIO0000000505 01/2016 349

Interoperability
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Client
Introduction
within BMX NOR 0200 H as client.
communicate with BMX NOR 0200 H as client via the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
IEC 60870-5-104 = Companion standard for IEC 60870-5-101 over TCP/IP
IEC 60870-5-101 A2 = Addendum 2 for IEC 60870-5-101
Interoperability
subsets to implement particular telecontrol systems. Certain parameter values, such as the choice
of structured or unstructured fields of the INFORMATION OBJECT ADDRESS of ASDUs
represent mutually exclusive alternatives. This means that only one value of the defined
parameters is admitted per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process
information in command and in monitor direction allow the specification of the complete set or
subsets, as appropriate for given applications.This clause summarizes the parameters of the
previous clauses to facilitate a suitable selection for a specific application. If a system is composed
of equipment stemming from different manufacturers, it is necessary that all partners agree on the
selected parameters.
The interoperability list is defined as in IEC 60870-5-101 and extended with parameters used in
this standard. The text descriptions of parameters which are not applicable to this companion
standard are strike-through (corresponding check box is marked black).

System or Device
- System definition
X Controlling station definition (master)
- Controlled station definition (slave)
350 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Application Layer

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively
in this companion standard
X Two octets
X Three octets X Structured
X Unstructured
X Two octets (with originator address). Set to zero in case of no originator address
Length of APDU
The maximum length of APDU for both directions is 253. It is a fixed system parameter.

X <7> Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
detection
descriptor
X <31> Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
X <32> Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
X <33> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
CP56Time2a
EIO0000000505 01/2016 351

Interoperability

X <35> Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
CP56Time2A
X <37> Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
- <38> Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
CP56time2a

X <58> Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
X <59> Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
X <60> Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
X <61> Setpoint command, normalized value with time tag C_SE_TA_1
CP56Time2a
X <62> Setpoint command, scaled value with time tag C_SE_TB_1
CP56Time2a
X <63> Setpoint command, short floating point value with time tag C_SE_TC_1
CP56Time2a
X <64> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1

352 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

X <105> Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
- <107> Test command with time tag CP56time2a C_TS_TA_1

X <112> Parameter of measured value, short floating point P_ME_NC_1
value
File transfer
- <127> Query log - Request archive file F_SC_NB_1
EIO0000000505 01/2016 353

Interoperability


Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1 X X
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
354 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability


Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<51> C_BO_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<60> C_RC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<61> C_SE_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<62> C_SE_TB_1 X X X X X X X X X
<63> C_SE_TC_1 X X X X X X X X X
<64> C_BO_TA_1 X X X X X X X
<70> M_EI_NA_1 X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X X X X X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X X X X X
<110> P_ME_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<111> P_ME_NB_1 X X X X X X X
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X X X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
EIO0000000505 01/2016 355

Interoperability
Read procedure
X Read procedure
- Single-point information
X Global
X Day of week used
356 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
X Direct command X Select and execute command
transmission
X Direct set point X Select and execute set point command
command
transmission
X C-SE-ACTTERM used
X Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter inn the outstation)
X Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter inn the outstation)
X Persistent output
X Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and set point commands
Configurable Maximum allowable delay of commands and set point commands
- Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
- Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
- Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported spontaneously
X Counter read
X Counter reset
X Request counter group 1...4
Parameter loading
X Threshold value
- Smoothing factor
X Low limit for transmission of measured values
X High limit for transmission of measured values
Test procedure
- Test procedure
EIO0000000505 01/2016 357

Interoperability
File transfer
- Transparent file
- Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
- Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
- Transparent file
Background scan
X Background scan
Definition of time outs
Parameters Default Remarks Selected Value
Value
t1 15s Time-out of send or test APDUs Configurable
t2 10s Time-out for acknowledges in case of no Configurable
data messages t2 < t1
t3 20s Time-out for sending test frames in case Configurable
of a long idle state
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1...255 s
Accuracy: 1 s
Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w)
Parameters Default Remarks Selected Value
Value
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence Configurable
number to send state variable
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I- Configurable
format APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1...12 APDUs
Accuracy: 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w: 1...8 APDUs
Accuracy: 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k
Server Connections Support
X supports connection of up to 64 servers when BMX NOR works as a client.
Portnumber
Parameter Value Remarks
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
358 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Redundant connections
Configurable Number N of redundancy group connections used
RFC 2200 suite
RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the
Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be
chosen by the user of this standard.
X Ethernet 802.3
- Serial X.21 interface
- Other selection from RFC 2200
EIO0000000505 01/2016 359

Interoperability
IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Server
Introduction
within BMX NOR 0200 H as server.
communicate with BMX NOR 0200 Has server via the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
IEC 60870-5-104 = Companion standard for IEC 60870-5-101 over TCP/IP
IEC 60870-5-101 A2 = Addendum 2 for IEC 60870-5-101
Interoperability
subsets to implement particular telecontrol systems. Certain parameter values, such as the choice
of structured or unstructured fields of the INFORMATION OBJECT ADDRESS of ASDUs
represent mutually exclusive alternatives. This means that only one value of the defined
parameters is admitted per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process
information in command and in monitor direction allow the specification of the complete set or
subsets, as appropriate for given applications.This Clause summarizes the parameters of the
previous Clauses to facilitate a suitable selection for a specific application. If a system is composed
of equipment stemming from different manufacturers, it is necessary that all partners agree on the
selected parameters.
The interoperability list is defined as in IEC 60870-5-101 and extended with parameters used in
this standard. The text descriptions of parameters which are not applicable to this companion
standard are strike-through (corresponding check box is marked black).
- Function or ASDU is not used

X Function or ASDU is used
System or Device
- System definition
- Controlling station definition (master)
X Controlled station definition (slave)
360 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Application Layer

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used
exclusively in this companion standard
X Two octets
X Three octets X Structured
X Untructured
X Two octets (with originator address). Set to zero in case of no originator address

X <13> Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
- <20> Packed single-point information with status change M_SP_NA_1
detection
descriptor
X <31> Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
X <32> Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
X <33> Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
CP56Time2a
X <35> Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
CP56Time2a
EIO0000000505 01/2016 361

Interoperability

X <37> Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
- <38> Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
CP56time2A

X <58> Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
X <59> Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
X <60> Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time 2a C_RC_TA_1
X <61> Set point command, normalized value with time tag C_SE_TA_1
CP56Time2a
X <62> Set point command, scaled value with time tag C_SE_TB_1
CP56Time2a
X <63> Set point command, short floating point value with time tag C_SE_TC_1
CP56Time2a
X <64> Bitstring of 32-bit with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1

362 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

X <105> Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
X <107> Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

X <112> Parameter of measured value, short floating point P_ME_NC_1
value
File transfer
- <127> Query log - Request archive file F_SC_NB_1
EIO0000000505 01/2016 363

Interoperability


Unknown type identification
Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<33> M_BO_TB_1 X X
<34> M_ME_TD_1 X X
<35> M_ME_TE_1 X X
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
364 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability


Unknown type identification
Background scan
Periodic, cyclic
Spontaneous
Deactivation
File transfer
Activation
Initialized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20...36 37...41 44 45 46 47
<51> C_BO_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<60> C_RC_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<61> C_SE_TA_1 X X X X X X X X X
<62> C_SE_TB_1 X X X X X X X X X
<63> C_SE_TC_1 X X X X X X X X X
<64> C_BO_TA_1 X X X X X X X
<70> M_EI_NA_1 X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X X X X X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X X X X X
<107> C_TS_TA_1 X X X X X X
<110> P_ME_NA_1 X X X X X X X
<111> P_ME_NB_1 X X X X X X X
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X X X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1 X X X X X X X X
EIO0000000505 01/2016 365

Interoperability
Read procedure
X Read procedure
- Single-point information
X Global
X Day of week used
366 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
X Direct command transmission
X Direct set point command transmission
X Select and execute command
X Select and execute set point command
X C-SE-ACTTERM used
X No additional definition
- Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
- Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
X Persistent output
X Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and set point commands
Configurable Maximum allowable delay of commands and set point commands
X Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
X Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
X Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported spontaneously
X Counter read
X Counter reset
Parameter loading
X Threshold value
- Smoothing factor
X Low limit for transmission of measured values
X High limit for transmission of measured values
EIO0000000505 01/2016 367

Interoperability
Test procedure
X Test procedure
File transfer
- Transparent file
- Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
- Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
- Transparent file
Background scan
X Background scan
Definition of time-outs
Parameter Default Value Remarks Selected Value
t1 15s Time-out of send or test APDUs Configurable
t2 10s Time-out for acknowledges in Configurable
case of no data messages t2 < t1
t3 20s Time-out for sending test Configurable
frames in case of a long idle
state
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1...255s,
Accuracy: 1s
Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w)
Parameter Default Value Remarks Selected Value
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive Configurable
sequence number to send state
variable
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after Configurable
receiving w I-format APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1...12 APDUs
Accuracy: 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w: 1...8 APDUs
Accuracy: 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k
Portnumber)
368 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Parameter Value Remarks

Portnumber 2404 In all cases
Redundant connections
0 Number N of redundancy group connections used
RFC 2200 suite
RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the
Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be
chosen by the user of this standard.
X Ethernet 802.3
- Serial X.21 interface
- Other selection from RFC 2200
EIO0000000505 01/2016 369

Interoperability
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Master
Introduction
The purpose of this information is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP3) within BMX NOR 0200 H as master.
This information, in conjunction with the DNP3 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP3 Subset
Definitions Document, provide detailed information on how to communicate with
BMX NOR 0200 H as master via the DNP3 protocol.
This implementation of DNP3 is fully compliant with DNP3 Subset Definition Level 3.
DNP3 Device Profile

The following table provides a "Device Profile Document" in the standard format defined in the
DNP3 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP3 Subset Definitions as a
"Document" it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table provides a complete
interoperability guide for BMX NOR 0200 H as master:
Vendor name: Schneider Electric
Device name: BMX NOR 0200 H
Highest DNP3 level supported: Device function:
For requests: Level 3 X Master
For response: Level 3 - Slave
Maximum data link frame size (octets): Maximum application fragment size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum data link re-tries: Maximum application layer re-tries:
- None X None
- Fixed at - Configurable
X Configurable from 0 to 65535
Requires data link layer confirmation:
- Never
- Always
- Sometimes
X Configurable as: Never or Always
370 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Requires application layer confirmation:
X Never
- Always
- When reporting Event Data
- When sending multi-fragment responses
- Sometimes
- Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data link confirm: - None - Fixed at - Variable X Configurable
Complete appl. fragment: X None - Fixed at - Variable - Configurable
Application confirm: X None - Fixed at - Variable - Configurable
Complete appl. response: X None - Fixed at - Variable - Configurable
Sends / Executes control operations:
WRITE Binary outputs - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
SELECT / OPERATE - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
Count > 1 X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Pulse on - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
Pulse off X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Latch on - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
Latch off - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
Qeue X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Clear queue X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Expects binary input change events:
- Either time-tagged or non-time-tagged for a single event
X Both time-tagged and non tagged for single event
- Configurable
EIO0000000505 01/2016 371

Interoperability
Sequential file transfer support:
Append file modes - Yes X No
Custom status code strings - Yes X No
Permissions field - Yes X No
File events assigned to class - Yes X No
File events assigned poll specifically - Yes X No
Multiple blocks in a fragment - Yes X No
Max number of files open 0
DNP3 Implementation Table

The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the
BMX NOR 0200 H as master in both request messages and in response messages.
In the following table, text in italic and underline indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond
Subset Level 2).
In the following table, text in bold indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.
Object REQUEST (Library may send) Function Codes (Library will

Parse)
Obj. Variation Description Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Qualifier Codes
No. No. Codes (dec) Codes (dec) (hex)
1 0 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Any Variation 06 (no range, or all)
1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
1 2 Binary Input with 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
2 0 Binary Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Change Any 07, 08 (limited qty)
Variation
2 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
Change without 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Change with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
372 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
Relative Time 130
(unsol. resp)
3 0 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
3 1 (default Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
see note 1) 06 (no range, or all) (response)
3 2 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Status 06 (no range, or all) (response)
4 0 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
4 1 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
4 3 (default Double Bit Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Relative Time 130
(unsol. resp)
10 0 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 1 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) (response)
1 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 2 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Status 06 (no range, or all (response)
11 0 Binary Output 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
11 1 Binary Output 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 373

Interoperability

Parse)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
12 1 Control Relay 3(select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
Output Block 4(operate) (response)
5(direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7(freeze) 00, 01 (start-stop)
8(freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9(freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl.
noack))
20 1 32-Bit Binary 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Counter 06 (no range, or all (response) (start-stop)
(with Flag)
(with Flag)
Counter without 06 (no range, or all (response) (start-stop)
Flag
Counter without 06 (no range, or all (response) (start-stop)
Flag
21 0 Frozen 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Counter Any 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
21 1 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
(with Flag)
Counter 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
(with Flag)
21 5 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Counter with 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Time Of Freeze
374 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
Counter with 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Time Of Freeze
Counter without 06 (no range, or all (response)
Flag
Counter without 06 (no range, or all (response)
Flag
22 0 Counter Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Event Any 07, 08 (limited qty)
Variation
22 1 32-Bit Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
Change Event 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
23 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Event (Variation 07, 08 (limited qty)
0 is used to
request default
variation)
23 1 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28 (index)
Counter Event 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 375

Interoperability

Parse)
23 2 16-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17,28 (index)
130
(unsol. resp)
23 5 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
30 0 Analog Input - 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
30 1 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Input 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Input 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Input without 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Flag
Input without 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Flag
30 5 short floating 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
point 06 (no range, or all) (response)
32 0 Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
32 1 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
376 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
32 5 short floating 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
point Analog 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Change Event 130
without Time (unsol. resp)
Change Event 130
with Time (unsol. resp)
34 0 Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all)
(Variation 0 is 07, 08 (limited qty)
used to request 17, 28 (index)
default variation)
34 1 16 bit Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Input Deadband 06 (no range, or all) (response) 17, 28 (index-see
07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 17, 28 (index)
34 2 32 bit Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Input Deadband 06 (no range, or all) (response) 17, 28 (index-see
07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
point Analog 06 (no range, or all) (response) 17, 28 (index-see
Input Deadband 07, 08 (limited qty) note 2)
17, 28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Status 06 (no range, or all)
(Variation 0 is
used to request
default variation)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 377

Interoperability

Parse)
Output Status 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Output Status 06 (no range, or all) (response)
point Analog 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Output Status
point Analog 06 (no range, or all) (response)
Output Status
41 1 32-Bit Analog 3(select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
5(direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
41 2 16-Bit Analog 3(select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
5(direct op)
6(dir. op, noack)
41 3 short floating 3(select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
point Analog 4(operate) (response)
Output Block 5(direct op)
6(dir. op,
noack)
Output Event 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
378 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
Output Event 130
without Time (unsol. resp)
Output Event 130
with Time (unsol. resp)
50 0 Time and Date
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 07 (limited qty = 1)
(response)
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 3 Time and Date 2 (write) 07 (limited qty)
Last Recorded
Time
51 1 Time and Date 129 07 (limited qty)
CTO (response) (qty = 1)
130
(unsol. resp)
51 2 Unsynchronized 129 07 (limited qty)
Time and Date (response) (qty = 1)
CTO 130
(unsol. resp)
52 1 Time Delay 129 07 (limited qty)
Coarse (response) (qty = 1)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07 (limited qty)
(response) (qty = 1)
60 0 Not Defined
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
20 (enbl. unsol.) 06 (no range, or all)
21 (dsbl. unsol.)
21 (dsbl. unsol.)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 379

Interoperability

Parse)
21 (dsbl. unsol.)
80 1 Internal 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01 (start-stop)
Indications (response)
2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(see note 2) index = 4 or 7
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)
NOTE: (1) For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded to when a
request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with
qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, are be responded to with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded to.)
NOTE: (2) Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for indexes 4 and 7 (Restart and Need
Time IIN).
380 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
DNP3 Interoperability for BMX NOR 0200 H as Slave
Introduction
The purpose of this information is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP3) within BMX NOR 0200 H as slave.
This information, in conjunction with the DNP3 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP3 Subset
Definitions Document, provide detailed information on how to communicate with
BMX NOR 0200 H as slave via the DNP3 protocol.
This implementation of DNP3 is fully compliant with DNP3 Subset Definition Level 3.
DNP3 Device Profile

The following table provides a "Device Profile Document" in the standard format defined in the
DNP3 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP3 Subset Definitions as a
"Document" it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table provides a complete
interoperability guide for BMX NOR 0200 H as slave:
Vendor name: Schneider Electric
Device name: BMX NOR 0200 H
Highest DNP3 level supported: Device function:
For requests: Level 3 - Master
For response: Level 3 X Slave
Maximum data link frame size (octets): Maximum application fragment size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: Configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum data link re-tries: Maximum application layer re-tries:
- None X None
- Fixed - Configurable
X Configurable from 0 to 65535
Requires data link layer confirmation:
- Never
- Always
- Sometimes
X Configurable as: Never, Only for multi-frame messages or Always
EIO0000000505 01/2016 381

Interoperability
Requires application layer confirmation:
- Never
- Always
- When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)
- When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
- Sometimes
X Configurable as: Only when reporting event data or When reporting event data or multi-fragment messages
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data link confirm: - None - Fixed at - Variable X Configurable
Complete appl. fragment: X None - Fixed at - Variable - Configurable
Application confirm: - None - Fixed at - Variable X Configurable
Complete appl. response: X None - Fixed at - Variable - Configurable
Others: Transmission delay, configurable
Select/Operate arm time out, configurable
Need time interval, configurable
Unsolicited notification delay, configurable
Unsolicited response retry delay, configurable
Unsolicited offline intercal, configurable
Sends / Executes control operations:
WRITE Binary outputs X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
SELECT / OPERATE - Never X Always - Sometimes - Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - Never X Always - Sometimes - Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK - Never X Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Count > 1 X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Pulse on - Never - Always - Sometimes X Configurable
Pulse off X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Latch on - Never X Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Latch off - Never X Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Qeue X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Clear queue X Never - Always - Sometimes - Configurable
Attach explanation if Sometimes or Configurable was checked for any operation.
382 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability
Reports Binary Input Change Events Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
when no specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
- Never - Never
- Only time-tagged - Binary Input Change with time
- Only non-time-tagged - Binary Input Change with relative time
X Configurable to send one or the other X Configurable
Sends unsolicited responses: Sends static data in unsolicited responses:
- Never X Never
X Configurable - When device restarts
- Only certain objects - When status flags change
- Sometimes (attach explanation) No other options are permitted
X ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
function codes supported
Default counter object/variation: Counter roll over at:
- No counters reported - No counters reported
X Configurable - Configurable (attach explanation)
- Default object - 16 Bits
Default variation: X 32 Bits
- Point-by-point list attached - Other value:
- Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment responses:
- Yes
- No
X Configurable
Sequential file transfer support:
Append file modes - Yes X No
Custom status code strings - Yes X No
Permissions field - Yes X No
File events assigned to class - Yes X No
File events send immediately - Yes X No
Multiple blocks in a fragment - Yes X No
Max number of files open 0
EIO0000000505 01/2016 383

Interoperability
DNP3 Implementation Table

The following table identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers
BMX NOR 0200 H supports in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-
change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, are responded to with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 are responded to with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded to.
In the following table, text in italic and underline indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond
Subset Level 2).
In the following table, text in bold indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.

Parse)
Obj. Variation Description Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Qualifier
No. No. Codes (dec) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input Any 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Variation 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17,
27, 28 (index)
1 1 (default Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 17, 28 (index
27, 28 (index) see note 2)
1 2 Binary Input with 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
2 0 Binary Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Change Any 07, 08 (limited qty))
Variation
Change without 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Change with Time 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
2 3 (default - Binary Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change with 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
Relative Time 130
(unsol. resp)
384 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
3 0 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
27, 28 (index)
3 1 (default Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
3 2 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
with Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
4 0 Double Bit Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Change Any 07, 08 (limited qty))
Variation
Change without 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Change with Time 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
4 3 (default - Double Bit Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change with 07, 08 (limited qty)) (response)
Relative Time 130
(unsol. resp)
10 0 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
27, 28 (index)
10 1 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 2 (default Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 385

Interoperability

Parse)
11 0 Binary Output 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
11 1 (default Binary Output 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change without 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Change with Time 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
12 1 Control Relay 3 (select) 4 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
Output Block (operate) 5 (response)
(direct op.) 6
(dir. op, noack)
12 2 Pattern Control 3 (select) 7 (limited quantity) 129 echo of request
Block 4 (operate) (response)
5 (direct op.)
6 (dir. op,
noack)
12 3 Pattern Mask 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 echo of request
4 (operate) (response)
5 (direct op.)
6 (dir. op,
noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
7 (freeze) 00, 01 (start-stop)
8 (freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9 (freeze clear) 07, 08 (limited qty)
10 (frz. cl.
noack)
Counter (with Flag) 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index
17, 27, 28 (index) see note 2)
386 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
20 5 (default - 32-Bit Binary 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) Counter without 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Flag 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index
Counter without 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 27, 28 (index)
Counter with Time 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Of Freeze 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index
Counter with Time 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Of Freeze 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index
21 9 (default 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) Counter without 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Counter without 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 387

Interoperability

Parse)
22 0 Counter Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07,
Event Any 08 (limited qty)
Variation
22 1 (default 32-Bit Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
22 2 16-Bit Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
Change Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Change Event with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
23 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07,
Event (Variation 0 08 (limited qty)
is used to request
default variation)
23 1 (default 32-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Counter Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
23 2 16-Bit Frozen 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
Counter Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
130
(unsol. resp)
Counter Event with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Counter Event with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
388 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
30 0 Analog Input - Any 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Variation 06 (no range, or all)
27, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
30 3(default 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1) without Flag 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
without Flag 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
30 5 short floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
32 0 Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07,
Event Any 08 (limited qty)
Variation
32 1(default 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1) Change Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
32 2 16-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 129 17, 28 (index)
Change Event 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 389

Interoperability

Parse)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
32 5 short floating point 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
Analog Change 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Event without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Analog Change 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Event with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
34 0 Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all)
(Variation 0 is used 07, 08 (limited qty)
to request default 17, 28 (index)
variation)
34 1 16 bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index-
34 2 32 bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index-
Analog Input 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Deadband 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index-
40 0 Analog Output 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Status 06 (no range, or all)
17, 27, 28 (index)
40 1 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
Output Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
390 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
40 2(default 16-Bit Analog 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
see note 1 Output Status 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28
17, 27, 28 (index) (index see
note 2)
Analog Output 06 (no range, or all) (response) (start-stop)
Status 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28
17, 27, 28 (index) (index see
note 2)
41 0 Analog Output 00, 01 (start-stop)
Block 06 (no range, or all)
17, 27, 28 (index)
41 1 32-Bit Analog 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
Output Block 4 (operate) 27 (index) (response)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op,
noack)
41 2 16-Bit Analog 3 (select) 17, 28 (index) 129 echo of request
Output Block 4 (operate) 27 (index) (response)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op,
noack)
41 3 short floating point 3 (select) 17, 27, 28 (index) 129 echo of
Analog Output 4 (operate) (response) request
Block 5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op,
noack)
42 0 Analog Output 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Variation
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
42 2(default 16-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 17, 28 (index)
see note 1 Output Event 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
EIO0000000505 01/2016 391

Interoperability

Parse)
Output Event with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Output Event with 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Analog Output 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Event without Time 130
(unsol. resp)
Analog Output 07, 08 (limited qty) (response)
Event with Time 130
(unsol. resp)
50 0 Time and Date
50 1 (default Time and Date 1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1) 129 07
see note 1) (response) (limited qty = 1)
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 3 Time and Date 2 (write) 07 (limited qty)
Last Recorded
Time
51 1 Time and Date 129 07 (limited qty)
CTO (response) (qty = 1)
130
(unsol. resp)
51 2 Unsynchronized 129 07 (limited qty)
Time and Date (response) (qty = 1)
CTO 130
(unsol. resp)
52 1 Time Delay 129 07
Coarse (response) (limited qty)
(qty = 1)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07 (limited
(response) qty)(qty = 1)
60 0 Not Defined
392 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Interoperability

Parse)
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07,
08 (limited qty)
21 (dab. unsol.)
22 (assign
class)
08 (limited qty)
21 (dab. unsol.)
22 (assign
class)
08 (limited qty)
21 (dab. unsol.)
22 (assign
class)
80 1 Internal Indications 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 00, 01
(response) (start-stop)
2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(see note 3) index=4 or 7
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)
No Object (function code only) 24(record current time)
NOTE: (1) A Default variation refers to the variation responded to when variation 0 is requested
and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Default variations are configurable; however, default settings for
the configuration parameters are indicated in the table above.
NOTE: (2) For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded to when a
request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with
qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, are responded to with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded to.)
NOTE: (3) Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for indexes 4 and 7 (Need Time IIN1-
4 or Restart IIN1-7).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 393

Interoperability
394 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Ethernet Language Objects
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Appendix B
About this Chapter

This chapter describes the language objects associated with the Ethernet communication
modules.
There is also a discussion of IODDTs. The IODDT (Input/Output Derived Data Type) is a data type
associated with a PLC channel or module. Expert modules are associated with specific IODDTs.

Section Topic Page
B.1 Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication 396
B.2 Exchange Objects of Type T_COM_ETH_BMX 401
B.3 Language Objects Associated with BMX NOR 0200 H Module Configuration 406
EIO0000000505 01/2016 395

Section B.1
Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication
Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet

Communication
About this Section

This section provides a general overview of language objects and IODDTs of Ethernet
communication.

Topic Page
Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication 397
Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function 398
Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific Function 399
396 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Language Objects and IODDTs of Ethernet Communication
General
Ethernet communication has the following IODDT:
T_COM_ETH_BMX: specific to modules with Ethernet communication
IODDTs are predefined by the manufacturer and contain input/output language objects belonging
to the channel of an application-specific module.
NOTE:
IODDT variables can be created with:
the I/O objects tab
the Data Editor
Types of Language Objects

Each IODDT has a set of language objects that is used to control and check the operation of the
IODDT. There are two types of language objects:
implicit: Implicit exchange objects are exchanged automatically on each cycle turn of the task
associated with the module. These exchanges concern the states of modules, communication
signals, slaves, etc.
explicit: Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the request of the application, using
explicit exchange instructions. These exchanges set parameters and diagnose the module.
Elsewhere in this guide are detailed descriptions for the IODDT types (see Modicon M340 for
Ethernet, Communications Modules and Processors, User Manual).
EIO0000000505 01/2016 397

Implicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific

Function
At a Glance
An integrated application-specific interface or the addition of a module automatically enhances the
language objects application used to program this interface or module.
These objects correspond to the input/output images and software data of the module or integrated
application-specific interface.
Reminders
The module inputs (%I and %IW) are updated in the PLC memory at the start of the task, the PLC
being in RUN or STOP mode.
The outputs (%Q and %QW) are updated at the end of the task, only when the PLC is in RUN mode.
NOTE: When the task occurs in STOP mode, either of the following are possible, depending on
the configuration selected:
outputs are set to fallback position (fallback mode)
outputs are maintained at their last value (maintain mode)
Figure
The following diagram shows the operating cycle of a PLC task (cyclical execution).
398 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Explicit Exchange Language Objects Associated with the Application-Specific

Function
Introduction
Explicit exchanges are performed at the user program's request using these instructions:
READ_STS (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (read status words)
WRITE_CMD (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (write command words)
WRITE_PARAM (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (write adjustment parameters)
READ_PARAM (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (read adjustment parameters)
SAVE_PARAM (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (save adjustment parameters)
RESTORE_PARAM (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library) (restore adjustment
parameters)
These exchanges apply to a set of %MW objects of the same type (status, commands or
parameters) that belong to a channel.
These objects can:
provide information about the module (for example, type of error detected in a channel)
have command control of the module (for example, switch command)
define the modules operating modes (save and restore adjustment parameters in the process
of application)
NOTE: To avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same channel, it is necessary to
test the value of the word EXCH_STS (%MWr.m.c.0) of the IODDT associated to the channel
before calling any EF addressing this channel.
NOTE: Explicit exchanges are not supported when M340 analog and digital I/O modules are
configured through an M340 Ethernet RIO adapter module in a Quantum EIO configuration. You
cannot set up a module's parameters from the PLC application during operation.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 399

General Principle for Using Explicit Instructions

The diagram below shows the different types of explicit exchanges that can be made between the
application and module.
Managing Exchanges
During an explicit exchange, check performance to see that the data is only taken into account
when the exchange has been correctly executed.
To do this, two types of information is available:
information concerning the exchange in progress (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block
Library)
the exchange report (see Unity Pro, I/O Management, Block Library)
The following diagram describes the management principle for an exchange.
NOTE: In order to avoid several simultaneous explicit exchanges for the same channel, it is
necessary to test the value of the word EXCH_STS (%MWr.m.c.0) of the IODDT associated to the
channel before calling any EF addressing this channel.
400 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Section B.2
Exchange Objects of Type T_COM_ETH_BMX
Exchange Objects of Type T_COM_ETH_BMX
About this Section

The section describes the implicit and explicit exchange objects of type T_COM_ETH_BMX.

Topic Page
Details of Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX 402
Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX 403
Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the Non-IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX 405
EIO0000000505 01/2016 401

Details of Implicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX
Objects
The IODDT of type T_COM_ETH_BMX has implicit exchange objects, which are described below.
This type of IODDT applies to the BMX NOR 0200 H module:
Standard Symbol Type Meaning Address

CH_ERROR BOOL the bit is set to indicate that a line error has %Ir.m.c.ERR
been detected
SERVICES_STS INT status of the different services %IWr.m.c.0
P502_STATUS_BIT BOOL Port 502 messaging service status (0=OK, %IWr.m.c.0.0
1=NOK)
IOS_STATUS_BIT BOOL reserved %IWr.m.c.0.1
GLBD_STATUS_BIT BOOL reserved %IWr.m.c.0.2
EMAIL_STATUS_BIT BOOL e-mail service status (0=OK, 1=NOK) %IWr.m.c.0.3
FDRS_STATUS_BIT BOOL reserved %IWr.m.c.0.4
NTPC_STATUS_BIT BOOL NTP Client service status (0=OK, 1=NOK) %IWr.m.c.0.5
TCPOPEN_STATUS_BIT BOOL Reserved for L2 (for future use) %IWr.m.c.0.6
NOTE: All objects are read only.
402 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX
System Words
The table below shows the meaning of the system word bits:
Standard Symbol Type Access Meaning Address

EXCH_STS INT R exchange status %MWr.m.c.0
STS_IN_PROGR BOOL R reading of status words of %MWr.m.c.0.0
the channel in progress
CMD_IN_PROGR BOOL R command parameter write %MWr.m.c.0.1
in progress
ADJ_IN_PROGR BOOL R adjust parameter %MWr.m.c.0.2
exchange in progress
RECONF_IN_PROGR BOOL R reconfiguration in %MWr.m.c.0.15
progress
EXCH_RPT INT R channel report %MWr.m.c.1
STS_ERR BOOL R channel status cannot be %MWr.m.c.1.0
read
CMD_ERR BOOL R a command cannot be %MWr.m.c.1.1
sent on the channel
ADJ_ERR BOOL R the channel cannot be %MWr.m.c.1.2
adjusted
RECONF_ERR BOOL R the channel cannot be %MWr.m.c.1.15
reconfigured
R = read only
Status Words
The table below gives the meanings of the status word bits CH_FLT (%MWr.m.c.2). The reading
is taken by a READ_STS:

INTERNAL_FLT BOOL R an internal error has been %MWr.m.c.2.4
detected or the self-test
cannot be completed
APPLI_FLT BOOL R an adjustment or %MWr.m.c.2.7
configuration error has been
detected
R = read only
EIO0000000505 01/2016 403

The table below shows the result of a READ_STS call:

ETH_STATUS INT R Ethernet port global %MWr.m.c.3
status
IP_ADDR DINT R IP address %MDr.m.c.4
P502_NB_CONN_DENIED INT R number of denied Port %MWr.m.c.6
502 connections
BW_MAX_MSG_IN INT R maximum number of %MWr.m.c.10
received messages on
the Ethernet port per
second
BW_MAX_MSG_BC INT R maximum number of %MWr.m.c.14
broadcast messages
received per second
reserved INT R reserved for future use %MWr.m.c.15
R = read only
Command Words
This table shows the available command words:

ETH_RESET BOOL W Ethernet component %MWr.m.c.16.0
reset
BW_CNT_RESET BOOL W max. message counters %MWr.m.c.16.1
reset
P502_CNT_RESET BOOL W messaging counters %MWr.m.c.16.2
reset
W = write only
The command is carried out with the WRITE_CMD (IODDT_VAR1) function.
404 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Details of Explicit Exchange Objects of the Non-IODDT Type T_COM_ETH_BMX
Status Words
The table below shows the result of a READ_STS call for non-IODDT objects:
Address Type Access Meaning

%MWr.m.c.7 INT R number of received messages on the Ethernet port per
second (BW_NB_MSG_IN)
%MWr.m.c.8 INT R number of useless messages filtered by the Ethernet
port per second (BW_NB_MSG_FILTER)
%MWr.m.c.9 INT R number of messages dropped by the Ethernet port per
second (BW_NB_MSG_DROP)
%MWr.m.c.11 INT R maximum number of useless messages filtered by the
Ethernet port per second (BW_MAX_MSG_FILTER)
%MWr.m.c.12 INT R maximum number of messages dropped by the
Ethernet port per second (BW_MAX_MSG_DROP)
%MWr.m.c.13 INT R maximum number of multicast messages received per
second (BW_MAX_MSG_MC)
R = read only
EIO0000000505 01/2016 405

Section B.3
Language Objects Associated with BMX NOR 0200 H Module Configuration
Language Objects Associated with BMX NOR 0200 H

Module Configuration
About this Section

This section describes the configuration language objects associated with the Ethernet
communication on the BMX NOR 0200 H module.

Topic Page
Language Objects for Implicit Exchange 407
Language Objects for Explicit Exchange 408
406 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Language Objects for Implicit Exchange
Introduction
This topic describes the implicit exchange language objects for the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
Input Bits
The following table describes the input bit (%I) language objects:
Object Description
%Ir.m.0.ERR the CH_ERROR bit
Input Words
The following table describes the input word (%IW) language objects:
Object Description
%IWr.m.0.0 status of Ethernet services:
bit 0: port 502 messaging service status (0=OK, 1=NOK)
bit 1: reserved
bit 2: reserved
bit 3: e-mail service status (0=OK, 1=NOK)
bit 4: reserved
bit 5:
BMX NOR 0200: reserved for future use
BMX P34 200: reserved for compatibility with the

BMX NOR 0200
bit 6: reserved for future use
bit 7: reserved
%IWr.m.0.1...%IWr.m.0.4 reserved
%IWr.m.0.5...%IWr.m.0.8 reserved
EIO0000000505 01/2016 407

Language Objects for Explicit Exchange
Introduction
This topic describes the explicit exchange language objects for the BMX NOR 0200 H module.
System Words
The following table describes the system word (%MW, READ) language objects:
Object Description
%MWr.m.0.0 exchange status (EXCH_STS):
bit 0 = 1: reading of status words of the channel in progress
(STS_IN_PROGR)
bit 1 = 1: command write in progress (CMD_IN_PROGR)
%MWr.m.0.1 exchange report (EXCH_RPT):

bit 0 = 1: the channel status cannot be read (STS_ERR)
bit 1 = 1: a command cannot be written to the channel (CMD_ERR)
Note: Always 0 for the BMX P34 200
Status Words
The following table describes the status word (%MW or %MD, READ) language objects:
Object Description
%MWr.m.0.2 CH_FLT bits:
bit 4 (%MWr.m.0.2.4) = 1: internal error detected or self-test cannot
complete (INTERNAL_FLT)
bit 7 (%MWr.m.0.2.7) = 1: application cannot be run (APPLI_FLT)
%MWr.m.0.3 Ethernet Port Global status (ETH_PORT_STATUS)

%MDr.m.0.4 IP address (IP_ADDR)
%MWr.m.0.6 number of denied Port 502 connections (P502_NB_CONN_DENIED)
%MWr.m.0.7 number of received messages on the Ethernet port per second
(BW_NB_MSG_IN)
%MWr.m.0.8 number of useless messages filtered by the Ethernet port per second
(BW_NB_MSG_FILTER)
%MWr.m.0.9 number of messages dropped by the Ethernet port per second
(BW_NB_MSG_DROP)
%MWr.m.0.10 maximum number of received messages on the Ethernet port per
second (BW_MAX_MSG_IN)
408 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Object Description
%MWr.m.0.11 maximum number of useless messages filtered by the Ethernet port per
second (BW_MAX_MSG_FILTER)
%MWr.m.0.12 maximum number of messages dropped by the Ethernet port per
second (BW_MAX_MSG_DROP)
%MWr.m.0.13 maximum number of Multicast messages received per second
(BW_MAX_MSG_MC)
%MWr.m.0.14 maximum number of broadcast messages received per second
(BW_MAX_MSG_BC)
%MWr.m.0.15 reserved for future use
Command Words
The following table describes the command word (%MW, WRITE) language objects:
Object Description
%MWr.m.0.16 Ethernet command word (ETH_CMD):
bit 0 = 1 for Ethernet Component Reset (ETH_RESET)
bit 1 = 1 for Max Message Counters reset (BW_CNT_RESET)
bit 2 = 1 for Messaging counters reset (P502_CNT_RESET)
%MWr.m.0.17 reserved for modulo 4 address alignment
EIO0000000505 01/2016 409

410 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Glossary
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Glossary
!
10/100 Base-T
An adaptation of the IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) standard, the 10/100 Base-T standard uses twisted-
pair wiring with a maximum segment length of 100 m (328 ft) and terminates with an RJ-45
connector. A 10/100Base-T network is capable of transmitting data on normal Ethernet (10 Mbit/s)
and Fast Ethernet (100 Mbits/s) networks.
B
BOOTP
bootstrap protocol. A UDP/IP protocol that allows an Internet node to obtain its IP parameters
based on its MAC address.
bridge
A bridge device connects two or more physical networks that use the same protocol. Bridges read
frames and decide whether to transmit or block them based on their destination address.
broadcast
Broadcast communications send packets from a one station to every network destination.
Broadcast messages pertain to every network device or only one device for which the address is
not known. (See multicast and unicast).
C
ConneXview
ConneXview is a set of configuration files to be used with HiVision 6.x network management
software from Hirschmann Electronics GmbH & Co. KG. ConneXview makes it possible to manage
Schneider Electric Transparent Factory devices using HiVision 6.0 or newer. ConneXview is built
on the widely used simple network management protocol (SNMP).
D
DHCP
dynamic host configuration protocol. DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that allows network devices
(DHCP clients) to obtain their IP addresses from a DHCP server through a request to the server.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 411

Glossary
E
Ethernet
A LAN cabling and signaling specification used to connect devices within a defined area, e.g., a
building. Ethernet uses a bus or a star topology to connect different nodes on a network.
G
gateway
A device that connects networks with dissimilar network architectures and which operates at the
Application Layer of the OSI model. This term may refer to a router.
H
HTTP server
The installed HTTP server transmits Web pages between a server and a browser, providing
Ethernet communications modules with easy access to devices anywhere in the world from
standard browsers such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
I
IODDT
input/output derived data type. IODDT is a structured data type representing a module or a channel
of a PLC module. Each application expert module possesses its own IODDTs.
IP
Internet protocol. That part of the TCP/IP protocol family that tracks the Internet addresses of
nodes, routes outgoing messages, and recognizes incoming messages.
IP address
Internet protocol address. This 32-bit address is assigned to hosts that use TCP/IP.
L
LAN
local area network. A short-distance data communications network.
412 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Glossary
M
MAC address
media access control address. A 48-bit number, unique on a network, that is programmed into
each network card or device when it is manufactured.
multicast
Multicast communications send packets from a single source to a predefined multicast group of
network destinations, usually through a router or switch. Sending messages to just the group
members relieves unnecessary traffic created by broadcast communications and does not require
a separate unicast transmissions to each recipient.(See broadcast, unicast, GMRP.)
P
PLC
programmable logic controller. The PLC is the brain of an industrial manufacturing process. It
automates a process as opposed to relay control systems. PLCs are computers suited to survive
the harsh conditions of the industrial environment.
port 502
TCP/IP reserves specific server ports for specific applications through IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). Modbus requests are sent to registered software port 502.
R
router
A router device connects two or more sections of a network and allows information to flow between
them. A router examines every packet it receives and decides whether to block the packet from the
rest of the network or transmit it. The router attempts to send the packet through the network on
an efficient path.
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit.
S
SNMP
simple network management protocol. The UDP/IP standard protocol used to monitor and manage
devices on an IP network.
SNMP agent
The SNMP application that runs on a network device.
EIO0000000505 01/2016 413

Glossary
subnet mask
The subnet mask is a bit mask that identifies or determines which bits in an IP address correspond
to the network address and which correspond to the subnet portions of the address. The subnet
mask comprises the network address plus the bits reserved for identifying the subnetwork.
switch
A network switch connects two or more separate network segments and allows traffic to be passed
between them. A switch determines whether a frame should be blocked or transmitted based on
its destination address.
T
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the communication protocol of the
Internet.
TFE
transparent factory Ethernet. Schneider Electrics open automation framework based on TCP/IP.
Transparent Ready
Schneider Electrics Transparent Ready products (based on universal Ethernet TCP/IP and Web
technologies) can be integrated into real-time, data sharing systems, with no need for interfaces.
U
UDP
user datagram protocol. UDP is an Internet communications protocol defined by IETF RFC 768.
This protocol facilitates the direct transmission of datagrams on IP networks. UDP/IP messages do
not expect a response, and are therefore ideal for applications in which dropped packets do not
require retransmission (such as streaming video and networks that demand real-time
performance).
Unity Pro
Unity Pro is the programming software for all Unity PLCs. It includes 5 IEC languages that comply
with IEC 61131-3. Depending on requirements, the application may use a mixture of different
languages.
414 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU
Index
EIO0000000505 01/2016
Index
B I
BMXRWS128MWF, 38 IEC Data Object Mapping, 247, 258
IEC Event Queue Setting, 260
Interoperability, 327
C
clock synchronization, 94
M
memory card
D features, 38
Datalogging MIB, 58
configuration, 129 Modbus TCP messaging, 46
properties, 127 Modbus TCP/IP
datalogging service, 126 messaging, 53
recommendation, 134
debugging communication, 180
diagnostic message N
without memory card, 39 Network Management Protocol, 46
DNP3 Data Object Mapping, 288, 304 Network Time Protocol, 47
DNP3 Event Queue Setting, 309 NMT, 46
NTP, 47
E
email service P
configuration, 136 P/N, 263
Ethernet modules parameter settings, 396
communication requirements, 19
device name, 50
hardware, 50 S
hardware requirements, 19 SD memory cards, 38
language objects, 395 Serial Link, 29
Ethernet Port, 26
F
frame size
Ethernet, 54
G
grounding, 36
EIO0000000505 01/2016 415

Index
services
BootP, 47
DHCP, 47
FDR, 47
FTP, 47
Modbus TCP messaging, 46
Modbus TCP/IP messaging, 53
NMT, 46
NTP, 47
SMTP, 47
SNMP, 47, 57
SOAP, 47
SMTP, 47
SNMP, 47, 57
SOAP, 47
SOAP Web Services, 62
T
T_COM_ETH_BMX, 401
time stamp, 99
time synchronization, 94
X
X80
hardened, 40
ruggedized, 40
416 EIO0000000505 01/2016

Modicon X80 RTU: BMX NOR 0200 H Module User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Modicon X80 RTU: BMX NOR 0200 H Module User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Modicon X80 RTU: BMX NOR 0200 H Module User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Modicon X80 RTU

Modicon X80 RTU

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Product Related Information

The RTU Module for X80 Platforms

About the BMX NOR 0200 H Module

Introducing the BMX NOR 0200 H Module

About the Module

various modem connections

Functions and Protocols

Main RTU Protocol Features

Other built-in functions

BMX NOR 0200 H Hardware Characteristics

About This Part

What Is in This Part?

What Is in This Chapter?

Item Description Description

Label Pattern Indication

off Operations are normal (no detected errors).

Label Pattern Indication

Connection RJ45 female connector

Description Reference Length, m (ft)

Connection RJ45 female connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

The pins used by the RS 232 serial link are as follows:

The pins used by the RS 485 serial link are as follows:

BMX NOR 0200 H

0 BMX P34 2020 at rack position 0

What Is in This Chapter?

Step Action Illustration

Grounding of Installed Modules

Grounding Processors and Power Supplies

Example of Modicon M340 module:

SD Memory Card Data Storage Functionality

Without SD Memory Card

Modicon X80H (Hardened) Equipment

About this Part

What Is in This Part?

What Is in This Chapter?

Ethernet Services Overview

Modbus TCP Messaging

SOAP / XML server

About this Section

What Is in This Section?

Methods for IP Addressing

Summary of Valid IP Address Settings

Deriving IP Parameters from the MAC Address

Default IP Address Format

Modbus TCP/IP Messaging

About this Section

What Is in This Section?

The Messaging Configuration Tab

The Messaging tab is shown below:

Messaging Configuration Parameters

Accessing Messaging Configuration Parameters

Connection Configuration Area

About this Section

What Is in This Section?

SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview